RESTRICTEDWORLD TRADE
ORGANIZATIONIP/Q/BOL/1
IP/Q2/BOL/1IP/Q3/BOL/1
IP/Q4/BOL/1
13 February 2002
(02-0729)
Council for Trade-Related Aspects
of Intellectual Property RightsOriginal:  Spanish
REVIEW OF LEGISLATION
BOLIVIA1
This document reproduces the introductory statement by the delegation of Bolivia, the
questions addressed to it and the replies given in connection with the review of legislation at the
Council's meeting of 2 to 5 April 2001.2
_______________
I. INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT
A. GENERAL
Bolivia is pleased to inform you that it fully complies with its commitments under the TRIPS
Agreement.  In recent years the country has made significant strides beyond domestic provisions that
in some cases predated accession to the Agreement, and today it has a much more comprehensive and
specific body of legislation.  As this Council is awar e, Bolivia is a full and active member of the Latin
American subregional integration process known as the Andean Community.  The Community has a
very modern corpus of integration law, which has direct applicability and preeminence over each
member country's legal order.  The intellectual property issue has received very close attention underthe integration process, and prime examples of the significant results achieved are the Decisions
relating to copyright, breeders of new plant varieties, industrial property and access to genetic
resources.  This body of Decisions provides us with a full set of provisions enabling us to meet the
commitments stemming from the TRIPS Agreement.  The TRIPS Agreement is also part of our
domestic law, for Bolivia's membership in the WTO and the WTO Agreements have been ratified byour National Parliament.
In addition, Bolivia is in the process of framing an Intellectual Property Code and is planning
for its prompt entry into force.  The Bolivian Code  takes up and enacts the entire body of Andean law,
and even expands it by establishing administrative and enforcement regulations.  Hence, from the
regulatory standpoint our country fully complies with its commitments under the TRIPS Agreement.This is also the case in the administrative sphere , with the recent creation of the National Intellectual
Property Service (SENAPI), which is about to acquire status as an independent agency and is
undergoing decentralization.  Key aspects and operating procedures are detailed below.
                                                     
1 For the laws and regulations relevant to the subject under review and notified by Bolivia under
Article 63.2 of the Agreement, see documents IP/N/1/BOL/1;  IP/N/1/BOL/C/1 to 6 and 8;  IP/N/1/BOL/G/1;
IP/N/1/BOL/I/1 and 2;  IP/N/1/BOL/P/2 to 6;  and IP/N/6/BOL/1.
2 The minutes of the meeting were circulated in document IP/C/M/30.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 2
Regarding the way in which Bolivia honours its commitments under the TRIPS Agreement,
we would also like to emphasize the judicial aspect.  We have a Commercial Code, a Penal Code and
a Code of Criminal Procedure, which together constitute a corpus of provisions that is expected to
ensure full enforcement of intellectual property rights.  The Penal Code lays down specific sanctionsand penalties for copyright infringement, computer offences, acts in breach of industrial privileges,
patent violations, and offences against trade and industry.  The recently enacted Code of Criminal
Procedure classifies intellectual property offences as matters of public order and provides for penalties
ranging from fines to terms of imprisonment.
As to observance by Bolivian citizens of the commitments to safeguard intellectual property
rights, we are now trying to raise people's awareness and make them realize that this is a way to
promote their country's development, to attract inve stment and to become part of the international
process in which Bolivia has joined as a result of all the disciplines it has negotiated.
On the other hand – and this is a point I wish to emphasize – there is a large informal sector in
Bolivia, stemming from the conditions in which development has taken place in small countries such
as ours, where poverty is rife.  Informal practices obviously make it difficult for us to implement our
commitments to the full.  I am making this point to explain that, for countries such as Bolivia tohonour their commitments in the framework of the WTO,  especially in this regard, the price they have
to pay in economic, political and social terms often fails – as is the case in my country – to match the
benefits that can be derived from the international system.  Nevertheless, I can assure you that Bolivia
conducts a policy of considerable openness;  it does not engage in trade-distorting measures, nor does
it discriminate against any sector or provide any support or subsidies or apply any other measureliable to create conditions of unfair competition.  In so doing, it contributes to strengthen the
international trading system.  We often wonder, however, what the corresponding return may be and
are frequently surprised that in this World Trade Organization there is no clear evidence of firm action
to improve the international trading system on a continuing basis.
Obviously, in the case of intellectual property the cost of curbing informal practices and of
extending application of the standards mentioned earlier is extremely high.  In short, such are the
efforts that Bolivia has been making in recent years, and today we are pleased to report that we are
well on the way to implementing the TRIPS Agreement.  We have made considerable progress and
hope that it reflects the ECOSOC declaration on th e relationship between intellectual property rights
and human rights.  This contributes to the strengthening of the international trading system, but, again,
we often ask ourselves what the corresponding return may be.  We would like our efforts to be
matched by the identification of more effective means of fostering our development.  Likewise, wewould like the work that we are doing to meet  our commitments under the TRIPS Agreement to be
matched by actions that will preserve our genetic and biological heritage and by rules that will equally
and clearly safeguard our heritage of traditional knowledge.
As regards Bolivia’s Economic and Social Development Plan for 1997-2002, the Plan's
institutional pillar provides for development of the legal foundations required to ensure the swift,
efficient and competent administration of justice – in other words, the conditions of legal safety
needed for our country to become part of the drive towards scientific and technological progress and
cultural and economic development.  Hence, it is the State's duty to protect intellectual property
rights.  Pursuant to its mandate and in accordance with the Development Plan, the Vice-Ministry ofIndustry and Trade, attached to the Ministry of Economic Development, has promoted
implementation of the TRIPS Agreement by creating the requisite mechanisms and institutions;  one
of these institutions is the National Intellectual Property Service (SENAPI), which is making every
effort to raise awareness of, make improvements to, and proceed with this priority task.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 3
B. NATIONAL INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY SERVICE (SENAPI )
With the significant advances being made in the political and economic spheres and their
favourable impact in the social domain – and aware as we are of the obvious desire of countless
sectors to take part in this process by using the results of their work, enhanced by a wealth ofinventions and other products of human creativity, methodological research and technological
developments – we believe that the time has come for countries to strengthen, in partnership and on a
global scale, the institutional and organizational aspects of the defence, preservation and promotion of
intellectual property, through commitment to the integral development of our peoples.
Pursuant to the 1997 Law on the Organization of the Executive (LOPE), the Bolivian
Government accordingly established the National Intellectual Property Service (SENAPI) by SupremeDecree dated September 1998.
The Service is responsible for the management of intellectual property in Bolivia, conducting
policy studies and activities to ensure more effective legal protection for creative efforts by our
country's sectors and individuals, because today the product of such efforts is still scorned, misusedand plundered mercilessly as a result of shady capitalist interests, ranging from profits derived from
the drugs scourge to smuggling and money laundering, flouting respect for the individual in all
spheres of human creativity through cowardly theft of the intellectual property of our countries'
inhabitants.
We would like to make it clear that our view stems from the knowledge which not only we
inhabitants of this country, but also scholars su ch as d'Orbigny and so many others who visited
Bolivia, have of the vast creative potential of the Bolivian people.  Today our leaders have understood
this sufficiently to afford the means and conditions for our peoples to realize that potential over time,
and to place the fruits of artistic creativity and inventiveness at the service of industry.  The greatestsupport for our integral development will come fro m that precious combination of spiritual and
political coherence which is so vital in a common effort towards modernization in every sense of the
term.
In Bolivia, the regulation of intellectual property can be said to have developed with the
advent of the republican era.  In colonial times,  Ordinances by Viceroy Fuentes Clara, dating back to
1746 and relating to silversmithery, required works to be duly "registered and stamped";  RoyalRegulations and Duties relating to free trade between Spain and the Indies dated 12 October 1778
stated that goods dispatched to the Indies were to bear "respective and legitimate marks".  Such rules
ceased to apply as America fought to emancipate itself from colonial rule.
In the early days of the Republic, and following the entry into force of the main corpus of
Bolivian legislation, including the Civil Code of 1832 and the Commercial Code of 1834, the
protection of exclusive and temporary rights was laid  down in the Political Constitution of the State in
1843.
Lastly, it is important to note that Bolivia entered the modern age of intellectual property by
acceding to the World Intellectual Property Organization through a law passed on 12 February 1993,
and by ratifying major instruments of its industrial property regime, namely the Paris Convention
establishing a Union for the protection of industrial property, through Law No. 1482 of 6 April 1993,
and the Berne Convention, through Law No. 1439 of 8 February 1993.  The implementation of these
treaties is vital for the development of intellectual  property activities in Bolivia.  They serve as the
core instruments for building mechanisms for the pr otection of industrial property and ultimately for
developing trade and industry in Bolivia, as provided for under the TRIPS Agreement.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 4
As part of the modernization of intellectual property protection under way since September
1999, the Bolivian Government has officially established the National Intellectual Property Service
(SENAPI) and a Director and a specialized advisory team have been appointed, pursuant to DecreeNo. 25159.
The Intellectual Property Service is essentially in charge of managing the National Copyright
and Industrial Property Offices.  The former used to be functionally accountable to the Vice-Ministry
of Culture and the latter to the Vice-Ministry of Industry and Domestic Trade.  Under the new
structure, both Offices come directly under the SENAPI, which is a decentralized, self-administered
body with functional and line accountability to the Vice-Ministry of Industry and Trade and theMinistry of Economic Development, respectively.
C. L
EGAL PROVISIONS RELATING TO INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY IN BOLIVIA
1. Industrial property
Legal instrument Number Date of entry into force
Paris Convention for the
Protection of Industrial Property
(Convenio de la Unión de París
– CUP)Law No. 1482 6 April 1993
Ratification of Decision 344 –
Common Regime on IndustrialPropertySupreme Decree No. 24038 4 September 1996
Decision 486 – Andean
Common Industrial Property
Regime15 September 2000
Law on Industrial Patents 12 December 1916
General Law on Trademarks
and Industrial and Commercial
Registration15 January 1918
Commercial Code on Unfair
Competition: Arts 66-71;on Tradenames:  Arts 470-474;
on Trademarks:  Arts 475-483No. 168333 19 July 1979IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 5
Legal instrument Number Date of entry into force
Penal Code; Offences against
Industry and Trade:  Arts 232-
237No. 10426 23 August 1972
General Customs Law Law No. 1990 28 July 1999
24 July 197
2. Copyright
Legal instrument Number Date of entry into force
Universal Copyright
Convention22 December 1989
Berne Convention for the
Protection of Literary and
Artistic WorksLaw No. 1439 8 February 1993
Rome Convention for the
Protection of Performers,
Producers of Phonograms and
Broadcasting OrganizationsLaw No. 1476 2 April 1993
Decision 351 of the Cartagena
Agreement – Common
Provisions on Copyright and
Neighbouring Rights21 December 1993
Law on Copyright No. 1322 13 April 1992
Supreme Decree Regulating the
Law on CopyrightNo. 23907 7 December 1994
Ministerial Decree regulating
the operation of the National
Directorate of CopyrightNo. 042/96 5 June 1996
Supreme Decree regulating
SoftwareNo. 24582 25 April 1997IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 6
Legal instrument Number Date of entry into force
Supreme Decree establishing
the Interinstitutional Committee
on Intellectual PropertyNo. 24581 25 April 1997
Law on the Cinema No. 1302 20 December 1991
Regulations of the Law on the
CinemaSupreme Decree No. 23493 7 May 1993
Law on Telecommunications No. 1632 5 July 1995
Supreme Decree Regulating the
Law on TelecommunicationsNo. 24132 27 September 1995
Law Amending the Penal Code No. 1768 10 March 1997
3. Plant varieties
Legal instrument Number Date of entry into force
International Convention for the
Protection of New Varieties of
Plants (UPOV)
(Accession to the Acts of 1972and 1978)Law No. 1968 24 March 1999
Decision 345 – Common
Provisions on the Protection of
the Rights of Breeders of New
Plant Varieties21 October 1993
Establishment of the National
Seeds Council regulating seed
certification and control in
BoliviaSupreme Decree No. 23069 28 February 1992IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 7
Legal instrument Number Date of entry into force
Ministerial Resolution enacting
the Regulations on Seed
Production ControlNo. 443/86 12 December 1986
Enactment of the General
Regulations implementing
Supreme Decree No. 23069 and
establishing Protection of
Varieties through the Granting
of Titles of OwnershipMinisterial Resolution
No. 79/953 August 1995
Ministerial Resolution
regulating the National Seeds
Directorate and Programme3 August 1995
General Regulations on seed
certification and controlMinisterial Resolution
No. 64/969 August 1996
4. Biodiversity
Legal instrument Number Date of entry into force
Decision 391 – Common
Regime on Access to Genetic
ResourcesDecision No. 391 2 July 1996
Regulations on Biosafety Supreme Decree No. 2012
Convention on Biological
DiversityLaw No. 1588 25 July 1994
5. General international agreements
Legal instrument Number Date of entry into force
Convention Establishing the
WIPONo.1438 12 February 1993
TRIPS Agreement No. 1637 5 July 1995IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 8
Legal instrument Number Date of entry into force
Free-Trade Agreement between
Bolivia and MexicoSupreme Decree No. 23933 23 December 1994
Free-Trade Agreement between
Bolivia and the United States4 December 1991
Nairobi Treaty on the Protection
of the Olympic SymbolSupreme Decree No. 20521 21 September 1984
6. Competent national body – intellectual property
Legal instrument Number Date of entry into force
Law on the Organization of the
ExecutiveNo. 1788 16 September 1997
National Intellectual
Property ServiceSupreme Decree
No. 251594 September 1998
7. Competent national body – plant varieties
Legal instrument Number Date of entry into force
National Seeds Council Supreme Decree
No. 2309628 February 1992
National Intellectual Property Service (SENAPI)
The National Intellectual Property Service (SENAPI) is a decentralized, statutory body of the
Ministry of Economic Development, with a sphere of competence covering the national territory, its
own administrative structure, line accountability to the Ministry of Economic Development and
functional accountability to the Vice-Ministry of Industry and Domestic Trade (Article 2, Supreme
Decree No. 25159/September 1998).
The terms of reference of the Service are to administer the intellectual property regime, by
applying the rules governing industrial property and copyright.  It is the competent national authority
in this sphere (Article 3, Supr eme Decree No. 25159/September 1998).
The functions and terms of reference of the SENAPI are as follows:IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 9
(a) To grant exclusive rights, and to afford protection and legal safety for holders of
intellectual property rights;
(b) to ensure compliance with legal provisions and international conventions relating to
intellectual property, and to ensure protection of intellectual property;
(c) to receive and process applications for, register, grant or deal with any other matter
regarding intellectual property rights;
(d) to establish and keep the national intellectual property registers;
(e) to coordinate the implementation of strategies, policies, plans and programmes for the
development of protection of intellectual property rights;
(f) to represent the country, on behalf of the Government, in all national and international
negotiations on the subject, in coordination with the Ministry of Foreign Affairs andWorship;
(g) to publish all applications for registration, notifications and resolutions relating to
intellectual property in the Gaceta Oficial  de Bolivia  (Official Journal);  and
(h)  to frame and propose draft legislation pertaining to intellectual property.
In the framework of the Andean Community, Bolivia took an active part in the amendment of
Decision 344, which led to the approval by consensus of a new Andean Decision on
14 September 2000.  The new Decision – known as Decision 486 – comprises 16 Titles, 280 Articlesand three transitional provisions.  It entered into force for Bolivia on 1 December 2000.
The international treaties and conventions administered by WIPO that lay down the
procedures essential for the development of intellectual property in general allow recognition of the
Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT), which entered into force on 24 January 1978 for an initial group of
18 States (115 to date).  This global policy instru ment was extensively discussed at the WIPO / EPO /
OEPM / SENAPI Regional Seminar for the promotion of the Patent Cooperation Treaty in LatinAmerican countries, held in Santa Cruz de la Sierra, Bolivia, in June 2000.
In this regard, we are fairly confident that sensitivity on the part of all those seeking to ensure
worldwide protection for intellectual property rights will induce countries with means and resources
for their own development to show  solidarity with developing countries which – like ours – need
support in order to gain access to modern technologies and information regarding inventions for their
industries and other interested sectors.  This will pave the way towards our goal of preserving the
human capital, which encompasses the fruits of creativity in every sense of the term.
The Bolivian Government has accordingly decided to initiate the procedures required under
its legislation in order to accede to the Patent Cooperation Treaty.
Moreover, the National Congress now has before  it the new draft Intellectual Property Code,
which is one of the pillars of the reform of Bolivia's intellectual property regime.  The draft is
currently pending approval by the Chamber of Senators.
The Intellectual Property Code will contain recommendations and key provisions of the
regional and international agreements entered into by Bolivia, primarily in order to provide for correct
and appropriate enforcement measures and thus guarantee legal safety.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 10
Drug trafficking has not succeeded in bringing Bolivia to its knees, and those guilty of
intellectual piracy will never succeed in finding shelter in our country, because the rule of law will
prevail.
_______________
II. REPLIES TO QUESTIONS POSED BY CANADA
1. We understand that draft intellectual property legislation is still pending before the
Bolivian Congress.
(a) When is it likely to be effectively implemented?
Yes, it will be effectively implemented.  Once it has been approved by the legislative
power, promulgated by the executive power and published in the Gaceta Oficial de
Bolivia (Official Journal), it will enter into force immediately with binding effect.
(b) What are the key improvements introduced by such draft legislation in respect
of the TRIPS Agreement obligations?
The purpose of the draft3 is to strengthen Bolivian legislation and make it consistent
with multilateral standards, that is, basically the TRIPS Agreement.
2. Please describe how the enforcement obligations (Articles 41-61 of the
TRIPS Agreement) have been implemented.
As a means of providing the Government of Canada with the information requested, Bolivia's
replies to the Checklist of Issues on Enforcement are appended.4
3. What protection does your copyright legislation afford to "foreign works"?
Under Article 3 of Bolivia's Law No. 1322 on Copyright, the rights of all Bolivian authors
and those of foreigners resident in the country and the works of foreigners published for the first time
in the country are protected.  Non-resident foreigners enjoy the protection of this law to the extent that
they are entitled to do so under international conventions and treaties to which Bolivia is party.
Failing that, they will be granted equal treatment with Bolivians when the latter, in their turn, are
given the same treatment as nationals in the country concerned.
For the purposes of this law, authors who are stateless or refugees or whose nationality is
disputed are regarded as nationals of the country in which they have established their residence.
4. What are the key improvements introduced by Decision 486 on Intellectual Property,
which took effect on 1 December 2000, in re spect of the TRIPS Agreement obligations?
Decision 486 of the Andean Community – Common Industrial Property Regime – covers the
following forms of intellectual property:
                                                     
3 In Spanish only (Annex, pages 86-145 ).
4 See document IP/N/6/BOL/1.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 11
• Patents
• Utility models
• Layout-designs of integrated circuits
• Industrial designs
• Trademarks
• Advertising slogans
• Collective trademarks
• Certification marks
• Trade names
• Labels or emblems
• Geographical indications
• Well-known distinctive signs
• Industrial secrets
• Border measures
• Unfair competition
• Actions for infringement of rights
5. (a) Will revisions to your criminal legislation provide for criminal procedures and
penalties pursuant to Article 61 of the TRIPS Agreement?
Chapter X, Articles 362 and 363 and Chapter XI, Article 363 bis and 363 ter of the
Penal Code deal with intellectual property offences.  Moreover, the Code of Criminal
Procedure already establishes such offences as matters of public order. These
provisions are in force.
(b) When is such legislation likely to be implemented?
The application of Article 364 (repeal of penal laws) in the Final Section of the new
Penal Code should also be noted.
III. REPLIES TO QUESTIONS POSED BY THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITIES AND
THEIR MEMBER STATES
A. GENERAL
1. Please describe if your legislation includes measures necessary to protect public health
and nutrition, and to promote the public interest in sectors of vital importance to your socio-economic and technological development as mentioned under Article 8 of the
TRIPS Agreement.  If yes, please explain how such measures are consistent with the provisions
of the TRIPS Agreement.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 12
All the socioeconomic legislation currently in force in Bolivia is intended to promote the
public interest and the general welfare of the people.  It is not possible to single out any law in
particular within the terms of the question asked, since taking care of the public interest is a principle
of a general nature inherent in the function of the State.
However, by way of example, in the intellectual property field, it is possible to cite the
provisions of Article 65 of Decision 486 of the Cartegena Agreement Commission, which allows for
the possibility of compulsory licensing on public interest grounds.
The special provisions of the TRIPS Agreement (Parts II to VII) are subject to the General
Provisions and Basic Principles of Part I of the Agreement, including Article 8.  Article 8 of the
Agreement establishes certain principles and recognizes the right of WTO Members to safeguard
those principles in their domestic legislation.
The compatibility of any provisions in the national legislation with the TRIPS Agreement
would be ensured by Article 8 of that Agreement which legitimizes any measures that a WTOMember might take provided they are consistent with the provisions of the Agreement.
B. 
COPYRIGHT AND RELATED RIGHTS
2. Please state how your legislation provides for the protection of the exclusive rights of
authors in relation to their literary and arti stic works, as specified in Article 9 of the
TRIPS Agreement which requires Members to comply with Articles 1-21 of the
Berne Convention and the Appendix to the Berne Convention (1971).
Article 4 of Law No. 1322 on Copyright provides for the exclusive protection of the literary,
three-dimensional or audio form by means of which the ideas of the author are described, explained,
illustrated or incorporated in literary, scientific or artistic works.  The ideas contained in those literary
or artistic works and the ideological or technical content of scientific works and their commercial or
industrial exploitation are not subject to protection.
Article 6 of this Law also provides that the rights of authors in their literary, artistic and
scientific works are protected whatever the mode or form of expression employed and whatever the
intended use.
In Article 14 of Law No. 1322 reference is made to moral rights and it is stipulated that in
respect of his work the author has a perpetual, inalienable, imprescriptible and unrenounceable right:
• To claim authorship of his work at any time and, in particular, to have his name or
pseudonym indicated when any act relating to the utilization of his work is carried
out;
• to object to any distortion, mutilation or other alteration of the work;
• to keep his work unpublished or anonymous.  After the author's death, his work may
not be disclosed if he has forbidden it by testamentary disposition nor may hisidentity be revealed if not authorized by the same means.
These same rules are also contained in Article 11 of Decision 351 of the
Cartegena Agreement.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 13
Likewise, Article 15 of Law No. 1322 on Copyright refers to economic rights, stipulating that
an author of a protected work or his successors in title shall have the exclusive right to carry out,
authorize or prohibit any of the following:
(a) The reproduction of his work, in whole or in part;
(b) the translation, adaptation, arrangement or other transformation of the work;
(c) the communication of the work to the public by performance, broadcasting or any
other means of diffusion.
Article 13 of Decision 351 of the Cartagena Agreement adds the following:
(a) The distribution of copies of the work to the public by means of sale, lending or
hiring;
(b) the importation into the territory of any Member country of copies made without the
authorization of the owner of the rights.
Bolivia's Law No. 1322 on Copyright is strictly aligned on provisions 1 to 21 of the
Berne Convention, including Article 6 bis, as far as copyright and related rights are concerned.
3. Please describe the protection accorded to authors of computer programs, databases or
compilations of data.
Article 6.1 of the Law on Copyright specifies that computer programs (software) are
protected under special regulations.
After the Law was enacted, Supreme Decree No. 24582 of 25 April 1997, approving the
Software Regulations, was adopted.  Article 1 expressly provides for computer programs and
databases to be protected as literary works.  Likewise, Article 23 of Decision 351 of the
Cartagena Agreement provides for computer programs to be protected on the same terms as literaryworks.  This protection extends not only to operating programs but also to application programs, in
the form of either source codes or object codes.
Article 4 of Supreme Decree No. 24582 reaffirms the protection of software as a literary work
by stipulating that authors of software are protected by Article 14 of the Law on Copyright.  By way
of exception, and without prejudice to moral rights, under Article 6.1 of Law No. 1322, these
Regulations permit modifications and improvements to software and databases.
As regards economic rights, in accordance with Articles 15 and 17 of Law No. 1322 on
Copyright, only the holders of economic rights in software may authorize or prohibit any form of
exploitation thereof, in particular, its marketing, renting, dissemination, reproduction, adaptation,
modification, improvement, translation, transformation and importation.
4. Please state whether your legislation provides for a rental right and, if so, the works to
which it applies.
Article 13(c) of Decision 351 of the Commissi on on the Cartegena Agreement establishes the
right of distribution in favour of the author with respect to his work, which comprises the right toauthorize or prohibit, among other things, the lending or hiring of the work.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 14
The copyright legislation provides for rental rights for phonogram producers and the holders
of economic rights in software.  Article 54 of Chapter II of Law No. 1322 on Copyright, concerning
phonogram producers, specifies that, with respect to his phonograms the phonogram producer has the
exclusive right to authorize or prohibit their reproduction, renting and communication to the public,including distribution by cable, satellite broadcasting or any other means of utilization.
With regard to economic rights, Supreme Decree No. 24582 of 25 April 1997, approving the
Software Regulations, stipulates, in Article 5, that in accordance with Articles 15 and 17 of
Law No. 1322 on Copyright only the holders of economic rights in software may authorize or prohibit
any form of exploitation thereof, in particular, its marketing, renting, dissemination, reproduction,
adaptation, modification, improvement, translation, transformation and importation.
5. Please describe the rights granted to performers, producers of phonograms (sound
recordings) and broadcasting organizations under your legislation.
Articles 34 to 36 of Decision 351 of the Cartegena Agreement recognize the rights of
performers.
Articles 37 and 38 of Decision 351 of the Cartegena Agreement recognize the rights of
producers of phonograms.
Articles 39 to 41 of Decision 351 of the Cartegena Agreement recognize the rights of
broadcasting organizations.
Article 53 of Law No. 1322 on Copyright states th at performers or their representatives have
the right to authorize or prohibit the fixing and reproduction, as well as the communication to the
public, transmission or any other form of utiliz ation of their performances.   Consequently, no one
may carry out any of the above-mentioned acts without the authorization of the performer.
The same Article provides for the rights granted to performers to be protected for 50 years
from 1 January of the year following the year of fixation or the year of performance.
A performer has the right to have his name associated with his performances and to object,
during his lifetime, to any distortion or mutilation of his performances or other act prejudicial theretothat might adversely affect his prestige or reputation.
On his death and for a period of 20 years thereafter, these rights may be exercised by his
heirs.
Article 54 of Chapter II, Producers of Phon ograms, of Law No. 1322 on Copyright provides
that with respect to his phonograms, the producer of phonograms has the exclusive right to authorize
or prohibit their reproduction, renting and communi cation to the public, including distribution by
cable, satellite broadcasting or any other means of utilization.  Under Article 55 of Law No. 1322, if a
phonogram published for commercial purposes or a reproduction of that phonogram is used withauthorization for broadcasting or for any other form of communication to the public, the user shall
make a fair and once only payment intended for both the performers and the phonogram producer.
The phonogram producer or his licensee and the performers or their representatives may agree on the
method of collection of the royalties for communica tion to the public.  In the absence of such an
agreement, the royalties shall be collected by the phonogram producer or his licensees and the sumreceived shall be divided equally between the performers, on the one hand, and the phonogram
producer, on the other.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 15
With regard to broadcasting organizations, in accordance with Article 57 of the Law on
Copyright, they have the exclusive right to authorize or prohibit the following acts:
(a) The rebroadcasting of their broadcasts;(b) the fixation of their broadcasts;(c) the reproduction of fixations of their broadcasts.
6. Please state whether your legislation provides  for any limitation or exception in relation
to each of the rights described above in acco rdance with the relevant provisions of the Berne
and Rome Conventions and in light of Articles 13 and 14.6 of the TRIPS Agreement.
Under Article 34 of Decision 351 of the Cartegena Agreement, performers have the right to
authorize or prohibit the communication to the public, in any form, of their live performances, and the
fixing and reproduction of their performances.  However, performers may not object to the
communication to the public of their performances where they in themselves are broadcastperformances or are made from a previously authorized fixation.
Similarly, Article 42 of Decision 351 of the Cartegena Agreement states that in the cases
allowed by the Rome Convention for the Protection of Performers, Producers of Phonograms and
Broadcasting Organizations, the domestic legislation of the Member countries may set limits on therights recognized in Chapter X on Neighbouring Rights.
Article 21 of Decision 351 of the Cartegena Agreement is in strict compliance with
Article 13 of the TRIPS Agreement since it reads:
"The limitations and exceptions to which copyright is made subject by the domestic
legislation of the Member countries shall be confined to those cases that do not conflict with a
normal exploitation of the work or unreasonably prejudice the legitimate interests of the
holder or holders of the rights".
7. Please state the terms of protection of each right described above and the work or
subject-matter to which it applies.
Decision 351 of the Cartegena Agreement specifies the following terms of protection for
copyright and related rights:
− Copyright:  the lifetime of the author and 50 years after his death.  Where the right is
owned by a legal entity, the term of protection shall not be less than 50 years from the
making, disclosure or publication of the work, as the case may be (Article 18).  Theterm of protection shall be counted from 1 January of the year following that of the
death of the author or that of the making, disclosure or publication of the work, as
appropriate (Article 20).
− Rights of performers:  not less than 50 years from 1 January of the year following that
in which the performance took place or in which the fixation, if any, was made
(Article 36).
− Rights of producers of phonograms:  not less than 50 years from 1 January of the year
following that in which the fixation occurred (Article 38).IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 16
− Rights of broadcasting organizations:  not less than 50 years from 1 January of the
year following that in which the broadcast occurred (Article 41).
Under Article 53 of Law No. 1322, performers' ri ghts have a term of protection of 50 years
from 1 January of the year following the year of fixation or the year of performance.
Article 19 of Law No. 1322 states that the term of protection for producers of phonograms
and broadcasting organizations is 50 years from 1 January of the year following the year of death or
that of the fixation, transmission or making of the work.
8. Please state how and under what provisions your legislation grants the retroactive
protection provided pursuant to Article 18 of the Berne Convention (the obligation of which
derives from Article  9 of the TRIPS Agreement) and Article 14.6 of the TRIPS Agreement.
Article 59 of Decision 351 of the Cartegena Agreement gives immediate effect to its
provisions, stipulating that terms of protection shorter than those specified in the Decision that are still
current will be automatically extended to the expiration of the terms for which the Decision provides.
Moreover, Article 60 stipulates that rights in works that did not enjoy protection under
national law prior to the Decision will automatically enjoy the protection accorded by the Decision,
without prejudice to rights acquired by third parties.
9. Please describe how and under what provisions Bolivian legislation provides for a rental
right according to Articles 11 and 14.4 of the TRIPS Agreement and, if so, the categories ofright holders and the works to which it applies.
Article 13(c) of Decision 351 of the Commissi on of the Cartagena Agreement establishes the
right of distribution in favour of the author with respect to his work.  This comprises the right to
authorize or prohibit, among other things, the lending or hiring of the work.
The copyright legislation provides rental rights for producers of phonograms and the holders
of economic rights in software.  Article 54 of Law No. 1322 on Copyright, which forms part of
Chapter II on Producers of Phonograms, stipulates that, with respect to his phonograms, the producer
of phonograms shall have the exclusive right to authorize or prohibit their reproduction, renting and
communication to the public, including distribution by cable, satellite broadcasting or any othermeans of utilization.
With respect to economic rights, Article 5 of Supreme Decree No. 24582 of 25 April 1997
approving the Software Regulations provides that, in accordance with Articles 15 and 17 of
Law No. 1322 on Copyright, only the holders of economic rights in software may authorize or
prohibit any form of exploitation thereof, in particular, its marketing, renting, diffusion, reproduction,
adaptation, modification, improvement, translation, transformation and importation.
C. 
TRADEMARKS
10. Please give the definition of a sign under your national legislation and explain under
what conditions it is protectable.
Article 134 of Decision 486 gives the definition and describes the requirements for the
registration of a trademark, stipulating that any sign that is capable of distinguishing goods and
services on the market and is capable of graphic representation constitutes a trademark.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 17
It adds that the nature of the goods or services to which the trademark is to be applied shall in
no case form an obstacle to the registration of the trademark.
11. Please confirm whether or not services are a protectable subject-matter in your
trademark law.  Please confirm if signs, such as trade names, are protectable.  Please describe if
elements such as sound, perfumes and containers are protectable.
The definition of a trademark in Article 134 of Decision 486 means that services are
protected.
Similarly, trade names are protectable under Article 190 of the same Decision.  That is to say,
any sign that identifies an economic activity, a business or a commercial establishment is protected.
Sounds, smells and three-dimensional signs can be registered as trademarks, provided that
they are capable of graphic representation and sufficiently distinctive.  However, with respect to
perfumes it should be pointed out that the principles of trademark law require the sign seeking
protection as a trademark to consist of an element which is applied or added to the product to bedistinguished.  The trademark must be perceivable as an element different or separable (physically or
conceptually) from the product to which it is applied.  Thus, with respect to products consisting of a
fragrance or perfume, the trademark could not consist of the perfume itself, since in that case it would
become confused with the product it was supposed to distinguish.
12. Please explain what the requirements of use are, if any, as a condition for a trademark
registration.  Please explain the definition of use and the conditions of maintenance of a
registration in that respect.
Under Article 166 of Decision 486, a trademark is considered to be in use when the goods or
services it distinguishes have been placed in circulation or are available on the market under thattrademark in the normal form and quantity, due account being taken of the nature of the goods or
services and the methods used for marketing them.
A trademark is also considered to be in use if it distinguishes only goods that are intended for
export from any of the Member countries, as stipulated in the provisions of the previous paragraph.
The use of a trademark in a form different from that in which it was registered only with
respect to details or features that do not alter its distinctive character do not constitute grounds for
cancellation of registration for non-use or lessen the protection afforded.
Similarly, under Article 167 of Decision 486, the burden of proof of trademark use rests with
the owner of the registration and commercial invoices, accounting documents and auditing certificatesthat demonstrate the regularity and the amount of the trade in the goods identified by the trademark
may, among other things, be employed to prove trademark use.
At the same time, the competent national office will, at the request of an interested party,
cancel a trademark registration after an uninterrupted period of non-use in any Member country,without valid reason, by the owner, a licensee or a nother person authorized by the owner, of at least
three years immediately before the start of the cancellation proceeding.
Cancellation of a registration for non-use may also be requested as a defence in an opposition
proceeding instituted on the basis of the unused trademark.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 18
Maintenance of the registration of a trademark shall also be limited by failure to renew (first
renewal:  ten years after the granting of the trademark).  However, proof of use will not be required
for renewal purposes.
13. Please confirm whether or not your legislation permits that the registration of
trademarks be indefinitely renewable
The registration of trademarks is indefinitely renewable for successive periods of ten years,
insofar as the holder of the registration or anyone with a legitimate interest applies to the competent
national office for the registration to be renewed within six months prior to its expiration or takes
advantage of the grace period of six months from the date of expiration of the registration.  During
this period the registration will remain fully valid.
14. Please describe the special requirements, if any, prescribed by your legislation
concerning the use of a trademark.
Under Article 166 of Decision 486 a trademark is considered to be in use when the goods or
services it distinguishes have been placed in circulation or are available on the market under thattrademark, in the normal form and quantity, due account being taken of the nature of the goods or
services and the methods used for marketing them.
A trademark is also considered to be use if it distinguishes only goods that are intended for
export from any of the Member countries, as stipulated in the previous paragraph.
D. 
GEOGRAPHICAL INDICATIONS
15. Please explain whether or not your trademark registration authority refuses a
trademark application if it contains a geographical indication.
Under Article 135(l) of Decision 486, in the Chapter on Registration Requirements, a sign
may not be registered as a trademark if it "consists of a national or foreign geographical reference that
is liable to create confusion in respect of its application to products or services".
Moreover, Article 135(j) stipulates that signs may not be registered as trademarks if they
reproduce, imitate or contain a protected indication of origin that is liable to create confusion or a
mistaken association with the indication in relation to the goods themselves or different goods, or
involve taking unfair advantage of the fact that the indication is well known to the public.
16. Please give the definition of a geographical indication in your legislation.
Article 201 in Title XII, Chapter I of Decision 486 states that:  "An appellation of origin shall
be understood to be a geographical indication consisting of the name of a particular country, region or
locality, or of a name which, without being that of a particular country, region or locality, refers to aspecific geographical area, which name is used to identify a product originating therein, the quality,
reputation or characteristics of which are exclusively or essentially attributable to the geographical
environment, including both natural and human factors."
17. Please describe and explain the provisions of your legislation establishing a link, if any,
between the characteristics of an indication and its geographical origin.
The definition of appellation of origin in Article 201 of Decision 486 of the Commission of
the Andean Community establishes a link between the particular qualities and characteristics of aIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 19
product and its geographical origin or the geographical area to which it refers.  According to this
Article, an appellation of origin is understood to be a geographical indication consisting of the name
of a particular country, region or locality, or of a name which, without being that of a particular
country, region or locality, refers to a specific geographical area, which name is used to identify aproduct originating therein, the qualities, reputation or characteristics of which are exclusively or
essentially attributable to the geographical environment in which it is produced, including both natural
and human factors.
18. Please describe how additional protection is granted by your legislation to wines and
spirits.  Please mention other types of products, if any, covered by this additional protection.
Additional protection is granted to wines and spirits by Article 215 of Decision 486.
This article reads:  "Member countries shall prevent use of a geographical indication
identifying wines or spirits for goods of this kind not originating in the place indicated by the
appellation of origin in question, even where the true origin of the goods is indicated or the
appellation of origin is used in translation or accompanied by expressions such as "kind", type","style", "imitation" or the like."
Member countries may not prevent continued and similar use of a particular appellation of
origin of another country identifying wines and spirits in connection with goods and services by any
of their nationals who have used that geographical indication continuously with regard to the same or
related goods or services within the territory of the respective Member country for at least ten years
preceding 15 April 1994 or, in good faith, prior to that date.
Similarly, Article 216 indicates that:  "The competent national authority shall, either
ex officio, or at the petition of one of the parties, declare the authorization to use a protectedappellation of origin null and void if granted in violation of this Decision.  The provisions stipulated
in this Decision in respect of trademark invalidation shall be applicable in this case, as relevant."
For its part, Article 217 states that:  "The competent national office shall, either ex officio or
at the request of one of the parties, where use not in keeping with the provisions of the respective
declaration of protection is proven, cancel the authorization for use of the appellation of origin.  The
relevant provisions stipulated in this Decision with regard to trademark cancellation shall beapplicable in this case."
Consequently, Article 218 reads:  "Competent national offices shall, where the petition is
made by producers, extractors, manufacturers or craftsmen with a legitimate interest in the matter or
the respective public authorities, recognize appellations of origin protected in another Membercountry.  In order to be eligible for such protection, appellations of origin must have been declared as
such in their countries of origin."
Article 219 specifies that:  "Competent national offices shall recognize the protection
accorded by third countries to appellations of origin or geographical indications, provided that anagreement to which the Member country in question is  party so specifies.  To be eligible for such
protection, these appellations must have been declared as protected in their countries of origin."
Finally, according to Article 220:  "Appellations of origin protected in accordance with the
stipulations of this Decision shall not, so long as that protection obtains, be considered common orgeneric in distinguishing the product they indicate".IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 20
19. Please explain how exceptions under Article 24 of the TRIPS Agreement are used in
your jurisdiction.  Please provide examples of the use of the exceptions by courts or lists of
names considered as generic in your jurisdiction.
Decision 486 refers to the following exceptions permitted by Article 24 of the
TRIPS Agreement:  the second paragraph of Article 215 of Decision 486 refers to the exception
provided for in Article in 24.4 of the TRIPS.  Article 202(b) of Decision 486 refers to the exception
provided for in Article 24.6, first sentence of the TRIPS Agreement.  Article 223 of Decision 486
refers to the exception provided for in Article 24.8 of the Agreement.  Article 219 of Decision 486
refers to the exception provided for in Article 24.9 of the Agreement.
E. INDUSTRIAL DESIGNS
20. Please explain whether or not your legislat ion extends to the protection of designs
dictated essentially by technical or functional considerations.  Please explain how textile designs
are protected.
Under Article 116(b) of Decision 486, industrial designs whose appearance is dictated
essentially by technical or functional considerations and which fail to incorporate any arbitrarycontribution by the designer are not registerable as industrial designs.
Textile designs are protected under the definition given in Article 113 of Decision 486,
according to which:  "the particular appearance of a product that results from any arrangement of lines
or combination of colours, or any two-dimensional or three-dimensional outward shape, line, outline,
form, texture or material, without the intended use or purpose of the said product being thereby
changed, shall be considered an industrial design," in so far as it incorporates an arbitrary contribution
by the designer.
21. Please explain how your legislation protects right holders of a design against importing
of articles bearing embodied or copied design.
These rights are protected by Article 129 of Decision 486, which reads:
"Registration of an industrial design shall conf er on the owner thereof the right to prevent
third parties from making use of the design concerned.  By virtue of that provision, the owner
of the registration shall be entitled to proceed against any third party who, without the consent
of the right holder, manufactures, imports, offers for sale, markets or makes commercial useof products that incorporate or reproduce the industrial design.
Registration shall likewise confer the right to proceed against any person who produces or
markets an article whose design only presents minor differences with respect to the protected
design or where appearance is the same as the latter protected design."
22. Please state whether or not your legislation provides for the right to issue a compulsory
licence for industrial designs.
Decision 486 does not provide for compulsory licensing for industrial designs.
23. Please indicate for what period of time your legislation grants protection for industrial
designs.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 21
Article 128 of Decision 486 states:  "Registration of an industrial design shall be for a term of
ten years, counted from the filing of the application in the Member country."
F. PATENTS
24. Please describe how your legislation defines the notions of: novelty, inventiveness and
industrial application.
According to Article 16 of Decision 486, the notion of novelty is defined as follows:
"An invention may be deemed new when not include d in the state of the art.  The state of the
art comprises everything that has been made available to the public by written or oral
description, use, marketing or any other means prior to the filing date of the patent or, whereappropriate, of the priority claimed …"
Article 18 of Decision 486 provides that:  "An invention shall be regarded as involving an
inventive step if, for a person in the trade with average skills in the technical field concerned, the said
invention is neither obvious nor obviously derived from the state of the art."
The notion of industrial application is defined in Article 19 of Decision 486 which stipulates
that:  "An invention shall be regarded as industrially applicable when its subject-matter may be
produced or used in any type of industry, industry being understood as that involving any productive
activity, including services."
25. Please explain whether or not in your legislat ion, patent or otherwise, patent rights are
enjoyed without any exclusions.  If exclusions a re provided for, please describe in detail how
these exclusions are applied in legal as well as practical terms.
Exclusions from patentability are specified in Articles 15 and 20 of Decision 486.
26. Please explain whether your legislation prov ides for the exclusion of inventions from
patentability based on ordre public or morality.  If so, please explain the relevant section of
your legislation and explain its formulation.  Please also explain if it has been applied in
practice.
Exclusion from patentability is specified in Article 20(a) of Decision 486, according to which
the following are not patentable:  "inventions, the prevention of the commercial exploitation of whichwithin the territory of the respective Member country is necessary to protect public order or morality,
provided that such exclusion is not merely because the exploitation is prohibited or regulated by a
legal or administrative provision."
This provision has not been applied in practice in Bolivia.
27. Please explain whether or not diagnostic, therapeutic and surgical methods are excluded
from patentability in your legislation.  If so, please explain the relevant section of your
legislation and explain its formulation.
This exclusion from patentability is provided for in Article 20(d) of Decision 486 which
stipulates that the following shall not be patentable:  diagnostic, therapeutic and surgical methods for
the treatment of humans or animals.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 22
28. Please explain whether or not plants, animals and essentially biological processes are
excluded from patentability in your legislation.  If so, please explain the relevant section of your
legislation and explain its formulation.
This exclusion from patentability is provided in Article 20(c) of Decision 486, according to
which the following shall not be patentable:  "plants, animals and essentially biological processes for
the production of plants or animals other than non-biological or micro-biological processes."
29. Please describe how and under what provisions micro-organisms, non-essentially
biological processes, microbiological processes and plant varieties are protected in your
legislation.  Please explain, in this respect, the relevant sections of your legislation.
Micro-organisms, non-essentially biological pr ocesses and micro-biological processes can be
protected by patents, since Decision 486 stipulates that "micro-organisms shall be patentable until
other measures are adopted as a result of the examination provided for in TRIPS Article 27.3(b)."
Within the context of Article 27.3(b) of the TRIPS Agreement, which reads:  "… Members
shall provide for the protection of plant varieties either by patents or by an effective sui generis
system or by any combination thereof", in acceding to UPOV Act 78 Bolivia adopted a sui generis
system for the protection of new varieties of plants .  At the same time, within the Andean Community
common provisions on the protection of the rights of breeders of new plant varieties, approved by
Decision 345, have been in force since 1993.
30. Please explain how your legislation protects  patent right holders against the importing
and against the offering for sale of a patented invention.
According to Article 52 of Decision 486:  "A patent shall confer on its owner the right to
prevent third parties not having the owner's consent from the acts of:
(a) where the subject-matter of the patent is a product:
(i) making the product;
(ii) offering for sale, selling or using the product, or importing it for these
purposes;  and
(b) where the subject-matter of the patent is a process:
(i) using the process;  or
(ii) carrying out any of the acts that are specified under paragraph (a) above with
respect to a product obtained directly by that process."
31. Please state if your legislation provides for patent product protection of pharmaceutical
and agricultural chemical products.  In the a ffirmative, please indicate the legal reference.
According to Article 14 of Decision 486:  "The Member countries shall grant patents for
inventions, whether goods or processes, in all areas of technology that are new, involve an inventive
step, and are industrially applicable."
32. Please clarify if the patent protection of a process, as provided for in your legislation,
covers the product obtained directly by that process.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 23
Under Article 14 of Decision 486, processes that are new, involve an inventive step and are
industrially applicable are patentable.
In accordance with Article 52(b) of Decision 486, a process patent confers on its owner the
right to prevent third parties not having the owner's consent from carrying out the commercial acts
specified therein with respect to a product obtained directly.
33. Please explain the additional conditions, if any, in your legislation other than the
sufficient disclosure of the invention in Articl e 29 of the TRIPS Agreement (e.g. submission of
justification for access to genetic material or prio r inform consent to its use).  If such additional
conditions exist, please point out the relevant legislations and describe the additional conditionsin detail.
Decision 391 of the Andean Community, which establishes a Common Regime on Access to
Genetic Resources, stipulates in its third complementary provision that:  "The competent national
offices on intellectual property shall require the applicant to give the registration number of the access
contract and supply a copy of it as a prerequisite for granting the respective right, when they arecertain or there are reasonable indications that the products or processes whose protection is being
requested have been obtained or developed on the basis of genetic resources or their by-products
which originated in one of the Member countries".
Article 26(h) of Decision 486 gives effect to the third complementary provision of Decision
391.  Thus, with this requirement calling for additiona l information, it is possible to verify the country
of origin of the genetic material, on the basis of which the products or processes forming the subject-
matter of the patent application have been obtained or developed, which also makes it possible to
check compliance with the provisions relating to prior informed consent for access to the genetic
resource in accordance with Bolivian regulations concerning access to genetic resources.
Article 29.2 of the TRIPS Agreement stipulates that:  "Members may require an applicant for
a patent to provide information concerning the applicant's corresponding foreign applications and
grants".  Article 26(h) of Decision 486 and the th ird complementary provision of Decision 391 fit
within this context.
Thus, the requirement is imposed on the applicant in order to obtain information that discloses
the invention sufficiently clearly and fully.
34. Please explain whether or not your legislatio n provides for compulsory licensing. If so,
please explain in detail the conditions under which a compulsory licence may be granted.  In
particular, please explain how your national le gislation considers individual merits in the
authorization of such use.
Compulsory licensing is provided for in Chapter VII, Compulsory Licensing, of Decision
486, Articles 61 to 69.
5
                                                     
5 Article 61.- At the expiry of a period of three years following a patent grant or of four years following
the application for a patent, whichever is longer, the competent national office may grant a compulsory licence
mainly for the industrial manufacture of the product covered by the patent, or for full use of the patentedprocess, at the request of any interested party, but only if, at the time of the request, the patent had not been
exploited in the manner specified in Articles 59 and 60, in the Member country in which the licence is sought, or
if the exploitation of the invention had been suspended for more than one year.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 24
                                                                                                                                                                    
Compulsory licences shall not be granted if patent owners are able to give valid reasons for their failure
to act, which may be reasons of force majeure or an act of God, in accordance with the domestic provisions in
effect in each Member country.
A compulsory licence shall be granted only if, prior to applying for it, the proposed user has made
efforts to obtain a contractual licence from the patent holder on reasonable commercial terms and  conditionsand that such efforts were not successful within a reasonable period of time.
Article 62.- Decisions to grant a compulsory licence, as stipulated in the previous article, shall be taken
after the patent owners have been notified to present their arguments as they see fit within the following
60 days.
The competent national office shall specify the scope or  coverage of the licence, and in particular shall
specify the period for which it is granted, the subject-matter of the licence, the amount of the remuneration, andthe conditions for the payment thereof.  The remuneratio n shall be set at an adequate level in accordance with
the individual circumstances of each case and, in particular, the economic value of the authorization.
Opposition to a compulsory licence shall not prevent it s exploitation or have any effect on any periods
that may be running.  The filing of an objection shall not prevent the patent owner, in the meantime, fromcollecting the remuneration specified by the competent na tional office on the part unaffected by the objection.
Article 63.- At the request of the owner of the patent or the licencee, the conditions governing the
compulsory licence may be changed by the competent national office where new circumstances so dictate and,in particular, when the patent holder grants another licence on terms that are more favorable than the existing
ones.
Article 64.- The licencee shall exploit the licenced invention within a period of two years following the
date the licence was granted, unless that licencee is able to give valid reasons for inaction consisting of force
majeure or an act of God.  Otherwise, at the patent owner’s request, the competent national office shall revokethe compulsory licence.
Article 65.- Following the declaration by a Member country of the existence of public interest, an
emergency, or national security considerations, and only for so long as those considerations exist, the patent
may be subject to compulsory licensing at any time.  In that case, the competent national office shall grant thelicences that are applied for.  The owner of the patent so licenced shall be notified as soon as is reasonablypossible.
The competent national office shall specify the scope or extent of the compulsory licence and, in
particular, the term for which it is granted, the subject-matter of the licence, and the amount of remuneration and
the conditions for its payment.
The grant of a compulsory licence for reasons of public interest shall not reduce the right of the patent
owner to continue exploiting it.
Article 66.- The competent national office may, either ex officio or at the request of a party, and after
having obtained the consent of the national antitrust authority, grant compulsory licences where practices are
noted that are detrimental to the exercise of free competition, especially where they constitute an abuse by the
patent owner of a dominant position in the market.
The need to correct anti-competitive practices shall be taken into account in determining the amount of
remuneration to be paid in such cases.
The competent national office shall refuse termination of a compulsory licence if and when the
conditions which led to the granting of the licence are likely to recur.
Article 67.- The competent national office shall grant a licence, upon request by the owner of a patent
whose exploitation necessarily requires the use of another patent, and that right holder has been unable to securea contractual licence to the other patent on reasonable commercial terms.  That licence shall, without prejudice
to the provisions of article 68, be subject to the following conditions:
(a) The invention claimed in the second patent shall involve an  important technical advance of
considerable economic significan ce in relation to the invention claimed in the first patent;
(b) the owner of the first patent shall be entitled to a cross-licence on reasonable terms to use the
invention claimed  in the second patent;  and
(c) the licence authorized in respect of the first patent shall  be non-assignable except with the
assignment of the second  patent.
Article 68.- In addition to the conditions provided for in the preceding articles, compulsory licences
shall be subject to the following:
(a) They shall be non-exclusive and may not be sublicensed;IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 25
35. Please explain how your legislation explicitly ensures that a proposed user has made
efforts to obtain authorization from the righ t holder on reasonable commercial terms and
conditions and that such efforts have not been successful within a reasonable period of time.  In
this context, how do you define "reasonable period of time"?  Please also explain how yourlegislation ensures that the use of a compulsory  licence shall be author ized predominantly for
the supply to the domestic market of the Member authorizing such use.
A compulsory licence will only be granted if the applicant has previously made efforts to
obtain a contractual licence from the patent holder on reasonable commercial terms and conditions
and these efforts have not been successful within a reasonable period of time.
The expression "reasonable period of time" has to be determined by the competent authority
on a case-by-case basis, in accordance with the relevant circumstances.
With regard to use predominantly for the home market, as one of the conditions under which
a compulsory licence will be granted, Article 68(g) stipulates that it must be used predominantly for
the supply of the domestic market.  This provision is consistent with Article 31(f) of theTRIPS Agreement.
36. Please state if your legislation grants addi tional protection for innovations after the
20 years of patent protection has lapsed.
Decision 486 does not provide for additional protection beyond the 20 years laid down in
Article 50.
37. Please explain how your legislation provide s for the enhanced patent protection of
patents or patent applications pending on 1
 January 1995.
Decision 486 does not provide additional protection based on the date of filing of the patent
application.  All patents are granted in conformity with the standards of protection specified in the
TRIPS Agreement and the domestic legislation.
38. Please explain how your legislation provides for the reversal of the burden of proof in
relation to process patents.
                                                                                                                                                                    
(b) they shall be non-assignable, except with the part of the business or goodwill which permits
its industrial use;  this shall be evidenced in writing and registered with the competent
national office.  Otherwise, those assignments or transfers shall not be legally binding;
(c) they shall be liable, subject to adequate protection of the legitimate interests of the persons so
authorized, to be terminated if and when the circumstances which led to them cease to exist
and are unlikely to recur;
(d) their scope and duration shall be limited to the purposes for which they were authorized;(e) in the case of patents protecting semi-condu ctor technology, a compulsory licence shall be
authorized only for public non-commercial us e or to remedy a practice declared by the
competent national authority to be anti-com petitive in accordance with Articles 65 and 66;
(f) they provide for payment of adequate remu neration according  to the circumstances of each
case, taking into account the  economic value of the licence, without prejudice to thestipulations of Article 66;  and
(g) they shall be used predominantly for the supply of the domestic market.Article 69.- Compulsory licences that fail to comply with the provisions of this Chapter shall be devoid
of any legal effect whatsoever.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 26
Article 240 of Decision 486 provides that, in cases where infringement of a patent on a
process for obtaining a product is claimed, defendants shall be liable to prove a difference between the
procedure they use to obtain the product and the procedure protected by the patent whose
infringement is claimed.  Any identical product produced without consent of the patent owner shall bepresumed, on these regards and unless otherwise proven, to have been obtained through the patented
process, if:
(a) The product obtained by means of the patented process is a new product;  or(b) there is a strong likelihood that the identical product was manufactured through the
patented process and the patent owner is unable, despite reasonable efforts, todetermine the process effectively used.
Consideration shall be given, in the presentation of evidence to the contrary, to the legitimate
interests of the defendant insofar as the protection of his business secrets is concerned.
39. Please explain the consequences for the patent applicant when he does not submit the
information requested under Article 29.1 of the TRIPS Agreement.
The patent application will not be processed until the additional information requested has
been submitted.
40. Please explain whether or not in your legislation, patents or otherwise, patent rights are
enjoyed without any exclusions or exceptions.   If exclusions or exceptions (other than
compulsory licences) are provided for, please desc ribe in detail how these exclusions are applied
in legal as well as practical terms.  If affirmative, please make a reference to relevant legislation.
Article 53 of Decision 486 establishes certain exceptions.  Thus, the patent owner may not
exercise the right with respect to the following acts:
(a) Acts carried out in a private circle and for non-commercial purposes;(b) acts carried out exclusively to experiment with the subject-matter of the patented
invention;
(c) acts carried out exclusively for the purposes of teaching or scientific or academic
research;
(d) the acts referred to in Article 5 bis of the Paris Convention for the Protection of
Industrial Property;
(e) where the patent protects biological material that is capable of being reproduced,
except for plants, using that material as a basis for obtaining a viable new material,
except where the patented material must be used repeatedly to obtain the new
material.
At the same time, Article 54 of Decision 486 reads as follows:"A patent shall not confer on its owner the right to proceed against a third party making
commercial use of a product protected by a patent once that product has been introduced intothe commerce of any country by the owner or another person authorized by the right holder or
with economic ties to that patent owner.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 27
For the purposes of the preceding paragraph, two persons shall be considered to have
economic ties when one of the persons is able to exercise a decisive influence on the other,
either directly or indirectly, with respect to the exploitation of the patent or when a third partyis able to exert that influence over both persons.
Where the patent protects biological material that is capable of being reproduced, the patent
coverage shall not extend to the biological material that is obtained by means of the
reproduction, multiplication, or propagation of the material that was introduced into
commerce as described in the first paragraph, provided that it was necessary to reproduce,
multiply, or propagate the material in order to fulfill the purposes for which it was introducedinto commerce and that the material so obtained is not used for multiplication or propagation
purposes".
Finally, Article 55 of Decision 486, states that:
"Without prejudice to the provisions stipulated in this Decision with respect to patent nullity,
the rights conferred by a patent may not be asserted against a third party that, in good faith
and before the priority date or the filing date of the application on which the patent was
granted, was already using or exploiting the invention, or had already made effective and
serious preparations for such use or exploitation.
In such case, the said third party shall have th e right to start or continue using or exploiting
the invention, but that right may only be assigned or transferred together with the business or
company in which that use or exploitation is taking place".
41. Please explain how your legislation provides for the reversal of the burden of proof in
relation to process patents.
Article 240 of Decision 486 provides that, in cases where infringement of a patent on a
process for obtaining a product is claimed, defendants shall be liable to prove a difference between the
procedure they use to obtain the product and the procedure protected by the patent whose
infringement is claimed.  Any identical product produced without consent of the patent owner shall be
presumed, on these regards and unless otherwise proven, to have been obtained through the patentedprocess, if:
(a) The product obtained by means of the patented process is a new product;  or
(b) there is a strong likelihood that the identical product was manufactured through the
patented process and the patent owner is unable, despite reasonable efforts, todetermine the process effectively used.
Consideration shall be given, in the presentation of evidence to the contrary, to the legitimate
interests of the defendant insofar as the protection of his business secrets is concerned.
G. 
LAYOUT -DESIGNS (TOPOGRAHIES ) OF INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
42. Please describe how your legislation protects topographies.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 28
The layout-designs of integrated circuits are protected, in accordance with Articles 36 and
37 of the TRIPS Agreement, by Articles 86 to 112 of Decision 486.6
                                                     
6 TITLE IV ON THE LAYOUT-DESIGNS (TOP OGRAPHIES) OF INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
CHAPTER I
DefinitionsArticle 86.- The following definitions shall apply for purposes of this Title:(a) Integrated circuit: a product, in final or intermediate form, of which at least one element is an
active element and some or all of whose interconnections are an integral part of the body or
surface of a piece of material that is intended to be used electronically;
(b) layout-design: the three-dimensional arrangement of the elements, regardless of form, of
which at least one is an active element, and their interconnection into an integrated circuit, aswell as that three-dimensional arrangement prepared for use in an integrated circuit to bemanufactured.
CHAPTER II
On the Requirements for Protection of Layout-designs of Integrated CircuitsArticle 87.- A layout-design shall be protected if it is an original design.A layout-design shall be considered original when it is the result of its creator’s intellectual efforts and
is not in common use in the integrated circuit industry.
Where composed of two or more elements in common use in the integrated circuit industry, a layout-
design shall be considered original only if the comb ination of those elements, as an assembly, meets this
requirement.
CHAPTER IIIOn the Right HoldersArticle 88.- The right to register a layout-design of an integrated circuit belongs to its designer.  That
right may be assigned or transferred by succession.
If two or more persons jointly prepare a layout-design, those persons shall share the right to protect it. 
The right to protection of a layout-design created und er a project or service contract entered into for
this purpose or within the framework of an employment relationship in which the designer has such function,shall correspond to the person who contracted for the project or service, or the employer, unless otherwise
stipulated under a contract.
CHAPTER IV
On the Application for RegistrationArticle 89.- The application to register a layout-design of an integrated circuit shall be filed with the
competent national office and shall contain the following information:
(a) The petition;(b) a copy or drawing of the layout-design and, if commercially exploited, a sample of that
integrated circuit;
(c) if pertinent, a statement of the date of first commercial exploitation of the integrated circuit
anywhere in the world;
(d) if pertinent, the statement of the y ear the integration circuit was created;
(e) a description of the electronic operation to be performed by the integrated circuit in the layout-
design;
(f) copies of any applications for registration or other protection filed for or obtained abroad by
the applicants or their assignees, referring to all or part of the layout-design for which aregistration application is being filed in the Member country;
(g) such powers of attorney as may be needed;  and(h) a proof of payment of the prescribed fee.
Article 90.- The petition to register an application for a layout-design of an integrated circuit shall be a
form and shall include the following information:
(a) The request for the registration;(b) the name and address of the applicant;(c) the nationality or address of the applicant and, if the applicant is a juridical person, the site of
incorporation;
(d) the name and address of the creator of the layout-design, if a person other than the applicant;
(e) the name and address of the applicant’s legal representative, if pertinent;IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 29
                                                                                                                                                                    
(f) the date, number, and office where any other application for registration or other protection
was filed or obtained abroad by the applicant or assignee in respect of all or part of the same
layout-design being applied for in the Member country, if pertinent;  and
(g) the signature of the applicant or the applicant’s legal representative.
Article 91.- Where the layout-design for which a registration application has been filed includes an
industrial secret, the applicant shall file, in addition to  the graphic representation required, a representation of
the lay-out omitting, erasing, or distorting the parts containi ng that secret.  It is necessary for the remaining parts
to be sufficient to allow for identification of the layout-design.
Article 92.- The date of reception of an application by the competent national office shall be considered
its filing date, provided that the application contained at least the following elements:
(a) An express or implicit statement that the application is being filed for the registration of a
layout-design;
(b) data that shall permit identification of the applicant or person filing the application or enable
the competent national office to communicate with that person;
(c) a graphic representation of the layout-design for which registration is being applied for;  and(d) the proof of payment of the prescribed fees.Failure to comply with any one of the requirements specified in this article shall result in refusal by the
competent national to process the application and no filing date shall be assigned to it.
CHAPTER V
On the Processing of the Application
Article 93.- The competent national office shall examine whether the subject-matter of the application
constitutes a layout-design as defined in Article 86 and whether the application contains the informationrequested in Articles 89, 90, and 91.  The competent national office shall not examine the originality of thelayout-design ex officio, unless reasoned oppos ition to the applicatio n has been presented.
Should any omission or defect be noted, the applicant shall be admonished to make the necessary
correction within a period of three months, and that failure to do so shall be considered abandonment and shallbe placed in the archives ex officio.  If the applicant does not make the correction within the allotted period, the
competent national office shall make that warn ing effective through a reasoned decision.
Article 94.- Having examined the application, the competent national office shall order its
announcement through the publication in the official govern ment gazette of a notice to be paid by the interested
party.
The pertinent provisions in respect of applications for investment patents shall be applicable to the
publication of the notice.
Article 95.- Any interested person may lodge a substantiated objection with the competent national
office, including information and documents that would be useful for ascertaining the registrability of a layout-design.
Pertinent provisions in respect of applications for invention patents shall be applicable to the
objections.
Article 96.- If the stipulated requirements are fulfilled, the competent national office shall register the
layout-design and issue a registration certificate containing the data included in the corresponding registry.
CHAPTER VIOn the Rights conferred by Registration
Article 97.- If the layout-design has been exploited commercially anywhere in the world, the
application for registration shall be filed with the competent national office of the Member country concernedwithin a period of two years from its first commercial exploitation.  If the application is filed after the expirationof that period, the registration shall be denied.
A layout-design not having been commercially exploited anywhere in the world may be registered only
if applied for to a competent national office of a Member country no later than 15 years after the last day of the
year the lay-out was created.  If the application is filed after that period has expired, its registration shall bedenied.
Article 98.- Exclusive rights over a registered layout-design shall have a duration of ten years from the
oldest of the following dates:
(a) The last day of the year the layout-design was first commercially exploited anywhere in the
world;  or
(b) the filing date of an application for registration with the competent national office of the
Member country concerned.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 30
                                                                                                                                                                    
The term of protection of a registered layout-design shall lapse in any case at the conclusion of a period
of 15 years counted from the last day of the year in which the layout-design was created.
Article 99.- The protection shall be applied irrespective of whether the integrated circuit in which the
protected layout-design has been incorporated has been  manufactured and irrespective of whether the layout-
design has been incorporated into an integrated circuit.
Registration of a layout-design of an integrated circuit confers on its holder the right to impede third
persons from performing any of the following acts:
(a) Reproducing, through incorporation into an inte grated circuit or in any other way, all or part
of the protected layout-design that complies with the requirements for originality stipulated inArticle 87;
(b) marketing, importing, offering for sale, selling, or otherwise distributing a protected layout-
design or an integrated circuit in which a protected layout-design is incorporated;  or
(c) marketing, importing, offering for sale, selling, or otherwise distributing an article
incorporating such a protected integrated circu it, only insofar as it continues to contain an
unlawfully reproduced layout-design.
Protection conferred by registration shall cover only the layout-design itself, and shall not extend to
any idea, process, system, technique, or data encoded or incorporated into the layout-design.
Article 100.- The right conferred by registration of the layout-design only may be asserted against acts
having industrial or commercial purposes. Registration shall not confer the right to impede the following acts:
(a) Acts carried out in a private circle and for non-commercial purposes;
(b) acts carried out exclusively for purposes of evaluation, analysis, or experimentation;(c) acts carried out exclusively for purposes of  teaching or scientific or academic research;
(d) acts referred to in Article 5 ter of the Paris Convention for the Protection of Industrial
Property.
Article 101.- Registration of a layout-design shall not give the holder the right to prevent third parties
from engaging in acts of commerce in respect of registered layout-designs, integrated circuits in which aprotected layout-design is incorporated , or articles containing those integrated circuits after the introduction of
the layout-design into the commerce of any country by the right holder or by any other person with the consentof or having economic ties to that right holder.
For purposes of the preceding paragraph, two person s shall be considered to have economic ties when
one of the persons is able to exercise a decisive influe nce over the other, either directly or indirectly, with
respect to exploitation of the layout-design, or when a third party is able to exert that influence over bothpersons.
Article 102.- The right holder to a registered layout-design may not prevent a third party from engaging
in acts of industrial or commercial exploitation in respect of a layout-design created by another person throughthe evaluation or analysis of the protected layout-desig n, where the layout-design thereby created fulfils the
requirements for originality stipulated in Article 87.  Nor may that right holder prevent those acts in respect of
integrated circuits in which the layout-designs so creat ed are incorporated or of articles incorporating those
integrated circuits.
Article 103.- The right holder of a registered layout-design may not prevent a third party from carrying
out the acts cited in Article 99 with respect to another layout-design originally created by a third party, even ifidentical.
Article 104.- Performance of any of the acts referred to in Article 99 in respect of an integrated circuit
incorporating an unlawfully reproduced layout-design or any article incorporating su ch an integrated circuit
shall not be considered an infringement of rights to a registered design, where the person performing or orderingsuch acts did not know and had no reasonable ground to know, when acquiring the integrated circuit or articleincorporating such an integrated circuit, that it incor porated an unlawfully reproduced layout-design.  After the
time that such person has received sufficient notice that the layout-design was unlawfully produced, that person
may continue to perform any of the acts with respect to the stock on hand or ordered before such time, but shallbe liable to pay the right holder a sum equivalent to a reasonable royalty such as would be payable under afreely negotiated licence in respect of such layout-design.
Article 105.- A layout-design registration that has been granted or is being processed may be assigned
or transferred by succession.
Any assignment or transfer of a layout-design registration shall be filed with the competent national
office.  Failure to register that assignment or transfer shall render it legally invalid in respect of third parties. 
Assignments or transfers, in order to be registered, shall be in writing.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 31
                                                                                                                                                                    
Any interested person may apply for registration of an assignment or transfer.
CHAPTER VII
On the Licensing System
Article 106.- The right holder for a layout-design that is registered or for which registration has been
filed may licence one or more parties to exploit that layout-design.
Any licence to use the layout-design shall be register ed with the competent national office.  Failure to
register the licence shall render it invalid with respect to th ird parties.  Licences, in order to be registered, shall
be in writing.
Any interested party may file for registration of a licence.The registered right holder shall inform the competent national office of any change in the name or
address of the registered layout-design right holder during the term of the licensing contract.  Otherwise, anynotification that may be made on the basis of the data entered in the registry shall be considered valid.
Article 107.- The competent national authority may, given a lack of exploitation or for reasons of
public interest, in particular a national emergency, or fo r public health or natural security considerations, or to
remedy an anti-competitive practice, and at the request of an interested party or of a competent authority, order
the following at any time:
(a) That layout-designs that are registered or for which  registration has been filed shall be used or
exploited industrially or commercially by a government institution or by one or more public orprivate legal entities that have been  expressly appointed to do so;  or
(b) that the said layout-design shall be subject to the granting of one or more compulsory licences,
in which case the competent  authority may grant such a licence to any person who applies forit, subject to the conditions that have been stipulated for that  purpose.
The conditions that have been stipulated for granting compulsory licences with respect to invention
patents shall be applicable to the granting of a compulsory licences in regard to a layout-design.
CHAPTER VIII
On the Invalidation of the RegistrationArticle 108.- The competent national authority may, either ex officio or at the request of a party and at
any time, declare the registration of a layout-design null and void, where:
(a) The subject-matter of the registration is no t a layout-design accordin g to the requirements
stipulated in Article 86;
(b) the registration fails to comply with the requirements for  protection set forth in Article 87;
(c) the registration was granted for a layout-design applied for after the expiration of one of the
periods established in Article 97;  or
(d) there are grounds for declaring the regist ration to be null and void according to domestic
legislation covering  administrative acts.
Where the grounds specified above are applicable to on ly a part of the layout-design, invalidation shall
be pronounced only in respect of that part, as pertinent, leaving the registration valid for the other parts,
provided that as a whole the layout-design complies with the requirements for originality stipulated inArticle 87.
The layout-design or the part of it that has been invalidated shall be deemed null and void as of the
filing date of the application for its registration.
Article 109.- Where defects in administrative acts fail to produce absolute invalidation as specified in
the preceding article, those acts shall be invalidated relatively.  In such cases, the competent national authority
may, in conformity with domestic legislation, declare them null and void within a period of five years countedfrom the date of registration.
Article 110.- The competent national authority may, where a layout-design registration has been
granted to a person that has no right to it, annul that  registration.  The invalidation proceeding may be brought
only by the person with a right to registration of that layout-design.  That right of action shall lapse five years
from the date the registration was granted or two years following the date on which the person to whom thatright belongs learned about the marketing in the Member  country of the product incorporating that layout-
design, whichever period expires first.
Article 111.- In invalidation proceedings, the competen t national authority shall request registered right
holders to present their  arguments and submit the proof they deem advisable.
Where that authority, under the domestic law of a Member country, is the competent national office,
the registered right holder shall present the arguments and submit the proof referred to in the previous article
within a period of two months following notification.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 32
43. Please explain what protection your national  legislation grants to right holders against
the unlawful importation, sale or distribution for commercial purposes of topographiesincluding integrated circuits or other articles in which a topography is incorporated in
accordance with Article 36 of the TRIPS Agreement.
Protection is provided in Article 99(c) of De cision 486, since registration of a layout-design
of an integrated circuit confers on its holder the right to impede third persons from marketing,
importing, offering for sale, selling or otherwise distributing an article incorporating a protected
integrated circuit, only insofar as it continues to contain an unlawfully reproduced layout-design.
44. Please explain how your legislation provides for the derogation from Article 36 of the
TRIPS Agreement as specified in Article 37 of the TRIPS Agreement where a person has no
knowledge or reasonable grounds to know when acquiring an integrated circuit or an article
incorporating such an integr ated circuit that it contains an unlawful topography.
Article 104 of Decision 486 stipulates that:  "Performance of any of the acts referred to in
Article 99
7 in respect of an integrated circuit incorporating an unlawfully reproduced layout-design or
any article incorporating such an integrated circuit sh all not be considered an infringement of rights to
a registered design, where the person performing or ordering such acts did not know and had no
reasonable ground to know, when acquiring the inte grated circuit or article incorporating such an
integrated circuit, that it incorporated an unla wfully reproduced layout-design. After the time that
such person has received sufficient notice that the layout-design was unlawfully produced, that person
may continue to perform any of the acts with respect to the stock on hand or ordered before such time,
but shall be liable to pay the right holder a sum e quivalent to a reasonable royalty such as would be
payable under a freely negotiated licence in respect of such layout-design."
45. Please state the term of protection granted by your legislation to topographies.
                                                                                                                                                                    
Before the expiration of the period stipulated in the previous article, the interested party may request an
extension of two additional months.
Once the periods stipulated in this article have expired, the competent national office shall rule on the
invalidation of the registration and notify the parties of its decision.
Article 112.- The competent national authority may, where necessary to rule on the invalidation of a
registration, request the right holder to submit one or more of the documents referred to in Article 89 with
regard to the registration that is the subject-matter of the proceeding.
7 Article 99.- The protection shall be applied irrespective of whether the integrated circuit in which the
protected layout-design has been incorporated has been  manufactured and irrespective of whether the layout-
design has been incorporated into an integrated circuit.
Registration of a layout-design of an integrated circuit confers on its holder the right to impede third
persons from performing any of the following acts:
(a) Reproducing, through incorporation into an inte grated circuit or in any other way, all or part
of the protected layout-design that complies with the requirements for originality stipulated inArticle 87;
(b) marketing, importing, offering for sale, selling, or otherwise distributing a protected layout-
design or an integrated circuit in which a protected layout-design is incorporated;  or
(c) marketing, importing, offering for sale, selling, or otherwise distributing an article
incorporating such a protected integrated circu it, only insofar as it continues to contain an
unlawfully reproduced layout-design.
Protection conferred by registration shall cover only the layout-design itself, and shall not extend to
any idea, process, system, technique, or data encoded or incorporated into the layout-design.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 33
Under Article 98 of Decision 486, exclusive rights over a registered layout-design shall have
a duration of 10 years from the oldest of the following dates:
(a) The last day of the year the layout-design was first commercially exploited anywhere
in the world;  or
(b) the filing date of an application for registration with the competent national office of
the Member country concerned.
H. UNDISCLOSED INFORMATION
46. Please explain whether or not your legislatio n grants a defined period of time for the
protection of undisclosed information.  If so, please give the time span.
In accordance with Article 263 of Decision 486, protection of an industrial secret shall last so
long as the conditions set out in Article 260 exist.8
47. Please explain how your legislation defines "undisclosed information".
Article 260 of Decision 486 defines an industrial secret as follows:
"Article 260.- An industrial secret shall be considered to be any undisclosed information
within the lawful control of an individual person or  legal entity that may be used for any productive,
industrial, or commercial activity and that is capable of being transmitted to a third party, so long asthat information:
(a) Is secret in the sense that it is not, as a body or in the precise configuration and
assembly of its components, generally known among or readily accessible to persons
within the circles that normally deal with the kind of information in question;
(b) has commercial value because it is secret;  and
(c) has been the subject of reasonable steps by the person lawfully in control of the
information, to keep it secret.
The information constituting an industrial secret may be related to the nature, characteristics,
or purpose of the products, production methods or pr ocesses, or the means or forms of distribution or
marketing of goods or rendering of services."
                                                     
8 Article 260.- An industrial secret shall be considered to be any undisclosed information within the
lawful control of an individual person or legal entity that may be used for any productive, industrial, or
commercial activity and that is capable of being transmitted to a third party, so long as that information:
(a) Is secret in the sense that it is not, as a body or in the precise configuration and assembly of its
components, generally known among or readily accessible to persons within the circles that
normally deal with the kind of information in question;
(b) has commercial value because it is secret; and(c) has been the subject of reasonable steps by th e person lawfully in control of the information,
to keep it secret.
The information constituting an industrial secret may be related to the nature, characteristics, or
purpose of the products, production methods or processes, or the means or forms of distribution or marketing of
goods or rendering of services.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 34
48. Please explain how your legislation de fines data submitted to governments or
governmental agencies.
The intellectual property legislation in force does not contain a definition of "data submitted
to governments or governmental agencies".  Article 266 of Decision 486 stipulates that when
requiring, as a condition for approving the marketing of pharmaceutical or of agricultural chemical
products which utilize new chemical entities, the submission of undisclosed test or other data, the
origination of which involves a considerable effort, a Member country shall protect such data against
unfair commercial use.  In addition, it shall protect such data against disclosure, except where
necessary to protect the public or unless steps are taken to ensure that the data is protected against
unfair commercial use.
I. ENFORCEMENT
49. Please describe how your legislation provides for effective action against infringement of
intellectual property rights.
Under Article 238 of Decision 486, owners of a right protected by that Decision may bring
action with the competent national authority against any persons infringing upon their right and alsoagainst any persons performing acts that are extremely likely to result in the infringement of that right.
In that action they may seek, among other things, the cessation of the infringing act and damages.
The same provision can be found in the Law on Copyright.
50. Please explain whether or not your legislation provides for a mechanism to appeal to
judicial bodies of final administrative decisions.
In Bolivia, administrative decisions may be reviewed by the competent judicial bodies.
51. Please describe how your legislation authorizes judges to order production of evidence
by the opposing party.  Please give precise information on what measures are taken to ensurethe protection of confidential information.
The judicial authorities may order the production of documents kept by one of the parties.
The publicity and confidentiality provisions of the Codes of Civil and Criminal Procedure are
applicable, as appropriate.
52. Please quote provisions of your legislation that authorize judges to order a defendant to
desist from an infringement.
The competent judicial authority may order, among other things, cessation of the acts that
constitute infringement;  withdrawal from commercial channels of products resulting from the
infringement;  prohibition of the importation or exportation of the products;  and adoption of measures
necessary to prevent the infringement from being continued or repeated (Article 241 of Decision 486).
53. Please quote what provisions of your legislation authorize judges to order the payment
to the right holder of adequate damages to compensate the injury he suffered.
Under Article 238 of Decision 486, owners of a right protected by virtue of that Decision may
bring action with the competent national authority against any persons infringing upon their right and
also against any persons performing acts that are extremely likely to result in the infringement of thatright.  In that action, among other things, they may seek damages.  The same provision can be found
in the Law on Copyright.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 35
54. Please quote what provisions of your legislation authorize judges to order the payment
of the right holder's expenses by the infringer.
Under Article 238 of Decision 486, owners of a right protected by virtue of that Decision may
bring action with the competent national authority against any persons infringing upon their right and
also against any persons performing acts that are extremely likely to result in the infringement of that
right.  In that action, among other things, they may seek damages.  The same provision can be found
in the Law on Copyright.
55. Please explain if and how judges have the authority to order that infringing goods are
placed outside channels of commerce or destroyed.
Judges may order the withdrawal from commer cial channels of those goods which infringe
intellectual property rights, as well as their destruction, either as a provisional court measure or as a
penalty in the event of a guilty verdict.
As far as border measures are concerned, the authority competent for intellectual property,
stating its reasons, may request the customs authority to prevent the clearance of the goods at any
time, subject to the provision of security suffic ient to protect the right holder in the event of
infringement, the amount of which must be fixed by the competent authority.
56. Please quote what provisions of your legislation authorize judges to indemnify a
defendant in the event of abuse by the plaintiff.
An action for damages is also open to anyone who has been the victim of recklessness on the
part of the plaintiff, where injury has been caused by abuse.  The judge may require the plaintiff to
post sufficient security before granting execution of a precautionary measure (Article 247 of
Decision 486).  The judge has power, before orderi ng execution of a provisional measure, to request
security or equivalent assurance from the plaintiff so as to ensure that there is no recklessness on the
part of the plaintiff in applying for the measure.
57. Please explain how your legislation implements Article 50 of the TRIPS Agreement.
The competent judicial authority may order, as a precautionary measure, the immediate
cessation of the unlawful activities, the attachment, sequestration, confiscation or preventive seizure,
as appropriate, of copies produced in violation, or the attachment, seizure, confiscation orsequestration of the apparatus or materials used for the commission of the unlawful act (Article 56 of
Decision 351).
The following provisional measures may be ordered:  the immediate cessation of all acts
constituting the alleged infringement, the withdr awal from commercial channels of all products
resulting from the alleged infringement, the suspension of the importation or exportation of the goods,
the establishment by the alleged infringer of an adequate guarantee, and the temporary closure of the
business belonging to the defendant or accused, if necessary, to avoid continuation or repetition of the
alleged infringement (Article 246 of Decision 486).
58. Please identify the competent authorities in your jurisdiction who receive requests from
right holders for an application to suspend the release of counterfeit goods by the customs
authorities.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 36
Any competent judicial authority within the national jurisdiction may receive requests from
individuals for an application ordering the customs authorities to suspend the release of goods that
infringe intellectual property rights.
59. Please indicate whether or not procedures are available to suspend the exporting of
counterfeit goods.
Article 250 of Decision 486 entitles the owner of a registered trademark who has valid
grounds for suspecting that the importation or exportation of counterfeit trademark goods will take
place to request the competent authority to suspend that customs operation.
Once infringement has been determined, such counterfeit trademark goods as the competent
authority may have seized may not be re-exported or subjected to a different customs procedure,
unless expressly authorized by the right holder.
60. Please quote what provisions of your legisl ation authorize the competent authorities to
order the destruction or disposal of infringing goods.
Article 255 of Decision 486 states that the competent national authority may order the
destruction or seizure of infringing goods, without prejudice to other rights of action available to the
right holder and subject to the right of the defendant to seek review by a judicial authority.
61. Please indicate whether or not your legislation provides for a de minimis imports
exception.
Under Article 256 of Decision 486, the border measures regime is not applicable to small
quantities of goods of a non-commercial nature cont ained in travellers' luggage or sent in small
consignments.
62. Please explain how your legislation implements Article 61 of the TRIPS Agreement.
Article 236 of the Penal Code establishes offences against industry and trade, stating;  "For
anyone who puts on sale industrial products with names and signs that are misleading as to their
origin, quantity or quality the penalty shall be imprisonment for six months to three years".
For copyright infringement and computer offences, Articles 362, 363, 363 bis and 363 ter of
the Penal Code establish penalties of three months to two years' imprisonment and a fine of 60 daysand one to five years' imprisonment and a fine of 60 to 200 days, respectively.
IV. REPLIES TO QUESTIONS POSED BY JAPAN
A. G
ENERAL
1. Please explain how Decisions 344, 345, 3 51, 391 and 486 of the Commission of the
Cartagena Agreement are implemented in your country, indicating whether they are applied
directly or through national legislation.
Andean Decisions 345, 351, 391 and 486 are applied directly under Article 3 of the Treaty
Establishing the Andean Court of Justice (Cochabamba Protocol of 1996), according to which:IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 37
"Decisions of the Andean Council of Fo reign Ministers or of the Commission and
Resolutions of the General Secretariat shall be directly applicable in Member countries as of the date
they are published in the Official Gazette of the Agreement, unless a later date is indicated therein."
2. Please explain exceptions or exemptions of  the National Treatment and Most-Favoured-
Nation Treatment under the Copyright and Neighbouring Rights Law, if any, as permitted in
Articles 3 and 4 of the TRIPS Agreement.
Law No. 1322 of 13 April 1992 on Copyright and Decision 351 (Common Provisions on
Copyright and Neighbouring Rights) do not establish any kind of exception provided for in Articles
3 and 4 of the TRIPS Agreement.
B. PATENTS
3. (i) Please describe how Decision 486 of the Commission of the
Cartagena Agreement and, if applicable, its national legislation define the notion
of "invention", in the light of Articl e 27.1 of the TRIPS Agreement stipulating
that patents shall be available for any "inventions" in all fields of technology,provided that they are new, involve an inventive step and are capable of
industrial application.  What is the reasoning that  the subject-matters
prescribed in Article 15(b) of Decision 486 are deemed non-inventions;  is it
because they exist in nature or because they are related to living things or
biological material?
Decision 486 does not include any definition of the notion of invention;  however, patents are
granted "for inventions, whether products or processes, in all fields of technology, provided they are
new, involve an inventive step and are capable of industrial application".
The items described in Article 15(b) of Decision 486 are not considered to be inventions
because they do not comply with the patentability requirements laid down in Article 14 of the
Decision, being products of nature and not man-made inventions.  For there to be an invention, what
already exists in nature must be transformed by man.
(ii) If a living thing, its part or biological material that has no previously recognized
existence has been first isolated or purified artificially from its surroundings in
nature (i.e., if it involves "human intervention"), is it deemed an invention underArticle 15 of Decision 486?  Otherwise, is it automatically deemed a
non-invention regardless of the extent of human intervention involved?
Biological material that has not previously been identified in nature and has been isolated or
purified artificially from its surroundings in nature is not deemed to be an invention within the contextof Article 15 of Decision 486.  However, under Arti cle 14 of Decision 486 the technological process
whereby the material has been isolated is deemed to be a patentable invention.  Thus, any separation,
isolation or purification process that complies with the patentability requirements can be the subject of
a process patent.
(iii) Where a particular type of chemical substance exists in nature but is neither a
part or whole of a living thing nor a biological material (such as carbon beads
isolated from the oil residue which is produced through the oil refinement
process when lamp oil and light oil are removed from crude oil), is it deemed an
invention under Article 15 of Decision 486 if it is first isolated or purifiedartificially from its surroundings?IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 38
We can only confirm the provisions of Article 14 of Decision 486 and the Government of
Bolivia's reply to Question 3(ii), and repeat that any separation, isolation or purification process that is
not intrinsic and complies with the patentability requirements may be the subject of a process patent.
Follow-up question
Please indicate whether or not a chemical su bstance (not a living thing or a procedure)
described in Japan's earlier Question 3(iii) is deemed an invention.
A chemical substance that exists in nature is not  deemed to be an invention.  Such a substance
would be a product of nature or a discovery but not a man-made invention.  The mere separation,
isolation or purification of substances existing in nature does not make separated, isolated or purified
substances patentable, except where these have been intrinsically transformed.  A product existing in
nature must be transformed by man in order to be deemed an invention.
Without prejudice to the foregoing, any separation, isolation or purification process may be
the subject of a process patent where it fulfils the patentability requirements.
4. Please explain whether or not the below-listed subject-matters are deemed an invention
under Article 15 of Decision 486 and, if applicable, its national legislation.  If any of thosesubject-matters is deemed a non-invention, please specify the reason. Please suppose that (a),
(h), (i), (l), (m), (n), and (o) have been no previously recognized existences and have been first
isolated or purified artificially from their surr oundings in nature, and that all of those listed
meet other requirements for patenting, such as novelty (in the sense that they have not been
known to the public), an inventive step, and industrial applicability.
(a) Human insulin isolated or purified from beta cells of a human pancreas
Not deemed to be an invention.  See replies to Questions 3(ii) and 3(iii).
(b) A gene which encodes  the said human insulin
If it is a question of a gene already existing in the human body, that is to say,
discovered in and isolated from the human body, it is not deemed to be an invention.
If it is a question of a gene created by man (for example, by genetic engineering) and
when introduced into the human body, or an appropriate medium, encodes and isexpressed in the production of human insulin, it is deemed to be an invention.
(c) An expression vector which carries the said gene
If it is a question of an expression vector already existing in the human body or in
nature, it is not deemed to be an invention.  An expression vector created by man
would be deemed to be an invention.
(d) Escherichia coli  transformed by the said expression vector
In the cases mentioned in subparagraphs (d), (h), (i) and (j) relating to
micro-organisms, Bolivia applies the provisions of Article 27.3(b) of the
TRIPS Agreement, via Decision 486 of the Andean Community.  Since the
discussion of this topic is to be taken up again at WTO level, the Andean Decision inquestion states this commitment in a transitional provision.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 39
A micro-organism modified by man is deemed  to be an invention.  If transformed by
means of the expression vector in question (or by any other method), it is considered
an invention, because it is not Escherichia coli  existing in nature.
(e) A process for producing human insulin by culturing the said Escherichia coli
Deemed to be an invention.
(f) Recombinant human insulin obta ined by the said process
Deemed to be an invention.
(g) A mutant obtained by genetically modifying the said recombinant human insulin
Deemed to be an invention.
(h) Baker's yeast isolated or purified artificially from its surroundings in nature
See the reply under subparagraph (d). Baker's yeast isolated or purified from its
surroundings in nature is not deemed to be an invention.  It is a product of nature, not
a man-made invention.  The mere isolation or purification of a substance already
existing in nature does not make this substance patentable, even if its existence was
not known previously.  A product of nature must be transformed by man to beconsidered an invention.
(i) A micro-organism which is isolated or purified artificially from its surroundings
in nature and produces an antibiotic mycin X
See the reply under subparagraph (d). A micro-organism which is isolated or purified
from its surroundings in nature is not deemed to be an invention.  It is a product of
nature, not a man-made invention.  The mere isolation or purification of a substance
already existing in nature does not make this substance patentable, even if its
existence was not known previously.  The method whereby isolation is achieved is
irrelevant in this regard, so that even if the method of isolation were novel, thesubstance thus isolated would not be patentable.
A micro-organism, which is a product of nature, must be transformed by man to be
deemed to be an invention.  A micro-or ganism not modified by man would be a
product of nature and would not be considered an invention.
(j) An antibiotic mycin X produced by the said micro-organism
See the reply under subparagraph (d). The patentability of the antibiotic produced by
the micro-organism in question depends on whether the antibiotic constitutes an
invention.  If the antibiotic was being produc ed naturally by the micro-organism prior
to the latter's isolation and purification, the antibiotic would be regarded as a product
of nature and would not deemed to be an invention.
On the other hand, if the micro-organism, as a result of its isolation and purification
through human intervention, produces a substance (an antibiotic) that it was not
producing in its natural state, the antibiotic in question could be considered to be the
result of human intervention.  In such a case, the antibiotic (but not the micro-IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 40
organism) could be deemed to be an invention, as it would stem from human impact
on nature.
(k) A mutant obtained by artificially muta ting the said micro-organism with UV ray
Deemed to be an invention.
(l) A hybridoma which produces an antibody recognizing antigen A
Deemed to be an invention.
(m) Human hepatocyte Y
If it is a question of an hepatocyte already existing in the human body (or in nature), it
is not deemed to be an invention.  An hepatocyte created by man would be deemed to
be an invention.
(n) Human liver tissue Z
As regards human liver tissue, if it is a qu estion of liver tissue already existing in the
human body (that is, in nature), this is not considered an invention.  Artificial liver
tissue, created by man, could in principle be deemed to be an invention.
(o) Carbon beads isolated from the oil resi due which is produced through the oil
refinement process when lamp oil and light oil are removed from crude oil
Not deemed to be an invention.  A substance existing in nature is not considered an
invention.  Such a substance would be a product of nature or a discovery but not a
man-made invention.  The mere separation, isolation or purification of substances
existing in nature does not make separated, isolated or purified substances patentable,
except where these have been intrinsically transformed.
5. Please explain the relationship between  Article 29.1 of the TRIPS Agreement and
Articles 26(h) and (i) of Decision 486 which oblige patent applicants to submit a copy of the
contract for access to genetic resources and a copy of the documents certifying the authorization
to use of traditional knowledge.  Does your country consider the above-mentioned applicant'sobligation as an enablement requirement which is clearly stipulated in Article 29.1 of the
TRIPS Agreement, or as an additional requireme nt which is not stipulated in that Article?
According to the third complementary provis ion of Decision 391 of the Andean Community
establishing a Common Regime on Access to Genetic Resources:
"The competent national offices on intellectual property shall require the applicant to give the
registration number of the access contract and supply a copy of it as a prerequisite forgranting the respective right, when they are certain or there are reasonable indications that the
products or processes whose protection is being requested have been obtained or developed
on the basis of genetic resources or their by-products which originated in one of the Member
countries".
Article 26(h) of Decision 486 implements the third complementary provision of Decision 391.
This requirement for additional information also makes it possible to verify the country of origin ofIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 41
the genetic material, on the basis of which the products or processes forming the subject-matter of the
patent application have been obtained or developed.
Article 29.2 of the TRIPS Agreement states that:  "Members may require an applicant for a
patent to provide information concerning the applicant's corresponding foreign applications and
grants".  Article 26(h) of Decision 486 and the third complementary provision of Decision 391 fit
within this context.
Thus, the applicant is required to ensure that he provides information that discloses the
invention sufficiently clearly and completely.
Likewise, Article 35 of Decision 391 states that:
"When access is requested to genetic resources or their by-products with an intangible
component (associated traditional knowledge), the acc ess contract shall incorporate, as an integral
part of that contract, an annex stipulating the fair and equitable distribution of the profits from use ofthat component and reflecting the consent of the possessors of the traditional knowledge.  The annex
shall be signed by the supplier of the intangible co mponent and the applicant for or user of the genetic
resource".
Thus, Article 26(i) of Decision 486 ensures compliance with Article 35 of Decision 391 and
Article 29.2 of the TRIPS Agreement as an additional information requirement.
Follow-up question
As to Japan’s earlier Question 5, please explai n how you relate a copy of the contract for
access to genetic resources and a copy of the documents certifying the authorization to use of
traditional knowledge to "information concerning the applicant’s corresponding foreign
applications and grants" stipulated in Article 29.2 of the TRIPS Agreement though such copies
are rarely required in foreign applications and grants.
There is no relationship between Article 29.2 of the TRIPS Agreement and Article 26(h)
and (i) of Decision 486 of the Andean Community.  The two Articles cover different subject matter.
Article 29.2 of the TRIPS Agreement stipulates that Members may require an applicant for a
patent to furnish information concerning corresponding foreign applications or grants.  Its purpose is
to facilitate verification of requirements for the patentability of the invention.  This is provided for in
Articles 46 and 47 of Decision 486.
The provisions of Article 26(h) and (i) of Decision 486 do not deal with the verification of
patentability requirements.  They simply require verification of the lawful access to genetic resources
or traditional knowledge serving as a basis for developing an invention.  Their purpose is to help
ensure respect for and compliance with domesti c, Andean Community and international legal
provisions (e.g., the Convention on Biological Diversity) governing access to genetic resources and
traditional knowledge.  Access to genetic resources and traditional knowledge falls within the purview
of intellectual property where the genetic resource or traditional knowledge gives rise to a patentable
technological development.
In order to deal with such cases, the provisio ns of Decision 486, which are consistent with the
relevant provisions of Decision 391 on access to genetic resources, seek to prevent a patent from
being granted for an invention created on the basis of an unlawfully obtained genetic resource or item
of traditional knowledge.  Patents for inventions are granted by the State as an incentive orIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 42
inducement for a lawful activity, namely the development of new technologies.  Should such an
activity be conducted on the basis of unlawfully obtained material or information (illegal access to a
genetic resource or traditional knowledge), the State is empowered not to grant a patent.  This is
consistent with the State policy on the protection of genetic resources and traditional knowledge,which is implemented at several different levels.
Subparagraphs (h) and (i) of Article 26 of Decision 486 lay down requirements concerning
the lawful granting of patents.  As in the case of other requirements for granting patents, these are not
dealt with in the TRIPS Agreement but fall within the scope of the domestic legislation of the WTO
Members.
6. Please explain the rationale of Article 21 of Decision 486 stipulating that a product
which has been already patented and included in the state of the art may not be the subject of a
new patent solely because the product is put to a use different from that originally contemplated
by the initial patent.
Please also explain how Article 21 of Decision 486 complies with Article 27.1 of the
TRIPS Agreement stipulating that patents shall be available for any inventions in all fields of
technology, provided that they are new, involve an inventive step and are capable of industrial
application.  Is the rationale of Article 21 based on the lack of novelty?  If so, can a patent claim
directed to a new "use" (not a "product" as such) be deemed a new invention?  What othertypes of patent claims for a new use can be patentable?
Article 21 of Decision 486 stipulates that a product or process already patented and included
in the state of the art may not be the subject of a new patent on the sole ground of having been put to a
use different from that originally contemplated.
Follow-up question
As to Japan’s earlier Question 6, please explain how a known chemical compound whose
therapeutic use was not known can be patented under Section 21 of the Decision 486.  How
about a known chemical compound whose insecticidal use was not known?
Article 21 of Decision 486 stipulates that a product or process already patented and included
in the state of the art may not be the subject of a new patent on the sole ground of having been put to a
use different from that originally contemplated.  This provision makes it clear that an invention
(whether a product or a process) may not be patented anew unless it meets the requirement of novelty
under patent law.  The requirement of novelty may not be circumvented on the ground that the
product or process is being put to a new use.
Where a known product or process is capable of being used – or applied – in a manner
different from that already known and such use fulfils the requirements for patentability (i.e., that it be
new, involve an inventive step and be capable of industrial application), the new use would constitutea patentable technical solution.  Such a patent can claim only the new use, not the product itself, as the
latter does not meet the requirement of novelty.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 43
V. REPLIES TO QUESTIONS POSED BY SWITZERLAND
A. PATENTS
1. Please explain whether, in the field of patents, the relevant Articles of Decision 486 of
the Commission of the Andean Community – the Common Industrial Property Regime – aredirectly applicable in your legislation or wh ether you have adopted national implementing
legislation. If through national legislation, please specify the relevant legislation.
In the field of patents, the provisions of Decision 486 (Common Industrial Property Regime)
have priority.  National legislation is not required to make the Decision applicable.  It has been in
force since 1 December 2000.
Likewise, it should be noted that Andean Decisions are directly applicable by virtue of the
third article of the Treaty Establishing the Andean Court of Justice (Cochabamba Protocol of 1996)
which states that:
"Decisions of the Andean Council of Foreign Ministers or the Commission and Resolutions of
the General Secretariat shall be directly applicable in Member countries as of the date they are
published in the Official Gazette of the Agreement, unless a later date is indicated therein".
B. 
PROTECTION OF UNDISCLOSED INFORMATION
2. Referring to the issue of unfair commercial use of data submitted by an applicant to the
responsible Authorities in the procedure for mark et authorization of a pharmaceutical or of an
agricultural chemical product: please explain if and how your law prevents the responsible
Authorities or a second applicant from relying on or referring to the original data of the first
applicant for the market authorization procedure of a second product equivalent to the product
of the first party. Does your legislation provide for time-limits before the expiration of whichsuch data cannot be relied upon or referred to by the Authorities or a second applicant?
In granting market authorization for a pharmaceu tical, the health authority does not require
documents specifying the manufacturing process or procedure so that, inasmuch as the applicant has
not submitted data that involve a considerable effort, there is no risk of disclosure of information that
could be used by a later applicant or the authority itself.  All that is required is a description of the
active and inactive ingredients.  The period of validity of the data is specified in the health registryimplementing measure.
In the Chapter on Industrial Secrets, Article 266 of Decision 486 states that:
  "Member countries, when requiring, as a condition for approving the marketing of
pharmaceutical or of agricultural chemical prod ucts which utilize new chemical entities, the
submission of undisclosed test or other data, the origination of which involves a considerable
effort, shall protect such data against unfair commercial use.  In addition, Member countries
shall protect such data against disclosure, except where necessary to protect the public or
unless steps are taken to ensure that the data is protected against unfair commercial use".
The health authorities which authorize the marketing of pharmaceutical and agricultural
chemical products are non-profit-making public sector entities that perform a function expressly
entrusted to them by law.  In this respect, it is understood that the use made by these authorities of the
data at their disposal, whatever its origin, within th eir own institutions and in fulfilment of their legal
duty to authorize the marketing of such products, does not constitute commercial or unfair use.  TheIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 44
data are used for government, not commercial pur poses and the use is by definition lawful since
required by the laws that govern the terms of reference and operation of these authorities.  Moreover,
the use of the data within these institutions does not involve any disclosure to third parties, since
under Article 265 of Decision 486 the latter never have access to the data in question.
VI. REPLIES TO QUESTIONS POSED BY THE UNITED STATES
A. GENERAL
1. Please describe, in relation to each form  of intellectual property covered by the
TRIPS Agreement, including plant variety protection, the manner in which national treatment
and most-favoured-nation treatment are provided to nationals of other WTO Members.
Decision 486 of the Andean Community – Common Industrial Property Regime – covers the
following forms of intellectual property:
• Patents
• Utility models
• Layout-designs of integrated circuits
• Industrial designs
• Trademarks
• Advertising slogans
• Collective trademarks
• Certification marks
• Trade names
• Labels or emblems
• Geographical indications
• Well-known distinctive signs
• Industrial secrets
• Border measures
• Unfair competition
• Actions for infringement of rights
Articles 1 and 2 of the Decision established the principles of national treatment and most-
favoured-nation treatment, respectively, in relation to the protection of intellectual property.
With regard to the principle of national treatment, Article 1 states that:
"Each Member country shall accord the nationals of other members of the Andean
Community, the World Trade Organization, and the Paris Convention for the Protection of
Industrial Property, treatment no less favourable than it accords to its own nationals with
regard to the protection of intellectual property, subject to the exceptions already provided inIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 45
Articles 3 and 5 of the Agreement on Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights
(TRIPS) and in Article 2 of the Paris Convention for the Protection of Industrial Property.
Member countries may also accord such treatment to the nationals of a third country under the
terms of their respective domestic legislation".
With regard to the principle of most-favoured-nation treatment, Article 2 of Decision 486
stipulates that:
"With regard to the protection of intellectual  property, any advantage, favour, privilege, or
immunity granted by a Member country to the nationals of any other Andean CommunityMember country shall be accorded to the nationals of all other Members of the World Trade
Organization or of the Paris Convention for the Protection of Industrial Property.
The stipulation set forth in the preceding paragraph shall be applicable without prejudice to
the reservations provided for in Articles 4 and 5 of the Agreement on Trade-Related Aspectsof Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS)".
At the same time, Decision 351 – Common Prov isions on Copyright and Neighbouring Rights
indicates, in Article 2, that "each Member country shall grant the nationals of other countries
protection no less favourable than that accorded to its own nationals in matters of copyright andneighbouring rights".
The WTO's Agreement on Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS)
was incorporated in the domestic legislation in 1995 as part of Bolivia's ratification of the Uruguay
Round Agreements, so that the principles of nati onal treatment and most-favoured-nation treatment
established therein form part of our legislation.
Bolivia is a member of the International Union for the Protection of New Varieties of Plants
under the Act of 1978, a situation consolidated by the ratification of UPOV in Law No. 1968 of
24 March 1999.
Article 3 of the Convention (National Treatment;  Reciprocity) reads:"Without prejudice to the rights specially prov ided for in this Convention, natural and legal
persons resident or having their registered office in one of the member States of the Union
shall, in so far as the recognition and protection of the right of the breeder are concerned,
enjoy in the other member States of the Union the same treatment as is accorded or mayhereafter be accorded by the respective laws of such States to their own nationals, provided
that such persons comply with the conditions and formalities imposed on such nationals.
Nationals of member States of the Union not resident or having their registered office in one
of those States shall likewise enjoy the same ri ghts provided that they fulfil such obligations
as may be imposed on them for the purpose of enabling the varieties which they have bred to
be examined and the multiplication of such varieties to be checked.
Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (1) and paragraph (2), any member State of the
Union applying this Convention to a given genus or species shall be entitled to limit thebenefit of the protection to the nationals of those member States of the Union which apply this
Convention to that genus or species and to natural and legal persons resident or having their
registered office in any of those States."IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 46
In addition, in the legislation on plant varieties currently in force, namely Decision 345 of the
Andean Community, reciprocity is specified in Article 18 concerning the right of priority:
"The owner of an application for the grant of a breeder's certificate filed in a country that
accords reciprocal treatment to the Member country in which registration of the variety is
being sought shall enjoy a right of priority for a period of 12 months for the purpose of
seeking protection for the same variety in any of the other Member countries.  This period
shall be calculated from the filing date of the first application.
In order to benefit from the right of priority, the breeder shall, in the subsequent application,
claim the priority of the first application.  The competent national authority of the Member
country in which the subsequent application has been filed may require the applicant to
supply, within a period of not less than three mont hs from the date of the said filing, a copy of
the documents which constitute the first application, which copy shall be certified true by the
authority with which that application was filed, and samples or other evidence that the variety
which is the subject-matter of both applications is the same."
In the Bolivian internal regulations, Ministerial Resolution No. 064/96 of 9 August 1996,
Article 15(p) stipulates that:  "Breeders established abroad shall enjoy equal rights with breeders
established in the country".
Clearly, in Bolivia, the entire legal basis for the protection of plant varieties accords to
foreigners and third parties treatment no less favour able than that accorded, in similar circumstances,
to nationals or residents.  This is confirmed by the statistics on protection, since in Bolivia more than
60 per cent of the currently protected varieties originated abroad.
B. COPYRIGHT AND RELATED RIGHTS
2. Please explain whether and how the copyright law of Bolivia complies with Article 9 of
the TRIPS Agreement requiring that Members co mply with all Articles 1 through 21 of the
Berne Convention (1971), except Article 6 bis, since Members do not have rights or obligations
relating to the latter Article under the TRIPS Agreement.
Bolivian copyright complies with Article 9 of the TRIPS Agreement and the provisions of
Article 6 bis of the Berne Convention.
Bolivia became a signatory to the Berne Convention for the Protection of Literary and Artistic
Works in 1982.  The provisions of Decision 351 of the Commission of the Cartagena Agreement on
Copyright reflect and fully comply w ith the rules of the Berne Convention.
With regard to the moral rights in Article 6 bis of the Berne Convention, they are recognized
in Articles 11 and 12 of Decision 351 of the Cartagena Agreement.
3. Please explain how the copyright law of Bolivia protects computer programs as literary
works and complications of data as required by Article 10 of the TRIPS Agreement.
Both in Decision 351 of the Cartagena Agreement and in Supreme Decree No. 24582 of
25 April 1997 approving the Software Regulations, computer programs and databases are protected as
literary works, in accordance with Article 10 of the TRIPS Agreement.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 47
4. Article 11 of the TRIPS Agreement requires that rental rights for computer programs
and cinematographic works be available.  Please  cite to the corresponding provision of the
copyright law of Bolivia.
Rental rights for computer programs are re gulated in Article 5 of Supreme Decree No. 24582
approving the Software Regulations, which stipulates that only the owners of economic rights in
software may authorize or prohibit any form of exploitation thereof and in particular, among other
things, software rental.
Cinematographic works enjoy the right established in Article 13(c) of Decision 351 of the
Cartagena Agreement, which specifies the right to authorize or prohibit, among other things, thelending or hiring of the work.
5. Please state the length and terms of protecti on the copyright law of Bolivia provides for
a work other than a photographic work or a work of applied art and cite to the relevant
provision of law.
Articles 18 and 19 of Law No. 1322 on Copyrigh t specify that the length of protection
accorded by the law for collective, audiovisual and photographic works, phonograms, broadcasting
programs and computer programs is 50 years from their publication, exhibition, fixation, transmission
or use, as appropriate, or if not published, from their creation.
6. Please describe the protection the copyright law of Bolivia provides for performers, and
the term of the protection.
Article 53 of Law No. 1322 on Copyright, relatin g to the rights of performers, states that
performers have the right to authorize or prohibit the fixing and reproduction, as well as the
communication to the public, transmission or any other form of utilization of their performances.
Consequently, no one may carry out any of the abov e-mentioned acts without the authorization of the
performer.  The same article provides for the rights granted to performers to be protected for 50 years
from 1 January of the year following the year of publication, fixation or performance, if there has
been no publication.
The performer has the right to have his name associated with his performances and to object,
during his lifetime, to any distortion or mutilation of his performances or other act prejudicial thereto
that might adversely affect his prestige or reputation.  On his death and for a period of 20 years
thereafter, these rights may be exercised by his heirs.
With respect to applied works of art, Article 50 of Law No. 1322 on Copyright provides that
the rights of the author of an artistic work or a manuscript are unrenounceable and inalienable and will
endure for the entire period of protection of the economic rights in the work in favour of the author
and his heirs and legatees.  However, Article 51 of Law No. 1322 explains that the above-mentioned
provision does not apply to works of architecture or works of applied art.
7. Article 14.2 of the TRIPS Agreement provides that producers of phonograms are to
enjoy the right to authorize or prohibit the direct or indirect reproduction of their phonograms.
Article 14.2 requires that producers of phonograms are to have the right to authorize or
prohibit the commercial rental to the public of originals or copies of their phonograms.  Pleasedescribe how the copyright law of Bolivia implements these obligations and indicate the term of
protection.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 48
Article 54 of Law No. 1322 on Copyright, in the chapter on producers of phonograms,
provides that with respect to his phonograms, the producer of phonograms has the exclusive right to
authorize or prohibit their reproduction, rental and communication to the public, including distribution
by cable, satellite broadcasting or any other means of communication.
Under Articles 18 and 19 of Law No. 1322 on Copy right, the term of protection lasts for the
lifetime of the author and 50 years after his death, in favour of his heirs, legatees and assigns.  This
period is calculated from 1 January of the year following the year of death or the year of fixation or
creation of the work.
8. Please provide an update, summary and text of any current legal reform projects
involving copyright as well as any pending crim inal legislation that may have an effect on
copyright.
Parliament is currently discussing a preliminary draft Intellectual Property Code.  This legal
instrument incorporates the international and Community agreements in force and implements theircopyright provisions.  The relevant part of the prelim inary draft, to be approved by the legislature, is
annexed to this document.
*
At the moment, there is no criminal legislation pending that might affect copyright, although
a new Code of Criminal Procedure was recently adopted.
9. Please describe how the Bolivian laws prov ide express protection for preexisting works,
performances and sound recordings, as required by Articles 9.1, 14.5 and 14.6 of the
TRIPS Agreement.  If such protection is no t expressly afforded under current statutes, please
explain whether the TRIPS Agreement is self-executing in Bolivia.
With respect to protection for pre-existing works, performances and sound recordings,
Law No. 1322 on Copyright is in strict compliance with the Berne Convention, including Article 6 bis
on moral rights.
Articles 18 and 19 of the Law on Copyright provide for protection for 50 years after the death
of the author in favour of his heirs, legatees or assigns.  The period is calculated from 1 January of theyear following the year of death or of publication, exhibition, fixation, transmission, utilization or
creation, as appropriate.
Article 54 of Law No. 1322 stipulates that, with respect to his phonograms, the producer of
phonograms shall have the exclusive right to authorize or prohibit their reproduction, rental orcommunication to the public, including distribution by cable, satellite broadcasting or any other
means of utilization.
Similarly, Article 57 of Law No. 1322 stipulates that broadcasting organizations shall enjoy
the exclusive right to authorize or prohibit the following acts:
• The rebroadcasting of their broadcasts;
• the fixation of their broadcasts;
• the reproduction of fixations of their broadcasts.
                                                     
* In Spanish only (Annex, pages 86-145).IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 49
Moreover, under Article 58 of Law No. 1322, the following, inter alia , belong to the National
Heritage as pre-existing works:
• Works whose authors have expressly waived their rights;
• the works of authors who have died without heirs or successors in title;
• works whose term of protection under Articles 18 and 19 has expired (this refers to
the 50-year term).
10. While the 1992 Copyright Law protects "computer programs" under the law, it does
not appear to protect them as "literary works."  Separate protection for computer programs is
found in a 1997 presidential decree.  Please explain in detail how the laws of Bolivia protect
computer programs as "literary works" as requi red by Article 10.1 of the TRIPS Agreement.
Article 6.1 of the Law on Copyright specifies that computer programs (software) are
protected under special regulations.
The subsequent Supreme Decree No. 24582 of 25 April 1997 approving the Software
Regulations expressly provides, in Article 1, that computer programs and databases shall be protected
as literary works.  Similarly, Article 23 of Decision 351 of the Cartagena Agreement specifies thatcomputer programs are protected on the same terms as literary works.  This protection extends not
only to operating programs but also to application programs, in the form of either source codes or
object codes.
C. 
TRADEMARKS
11. Please describe the subject-matter that can comprise a trademark under the Trademark
Law of Bolivia.
In Title IV on Trademarks, Article 134 of De cision 486 of the Andean Community indicates
that any sign that is capable of distinguishing goods and services on the market constitutes atrademark.  It adds that signs that are capable of graphic representation are eligible for registration as
trademarks.  The nature of the goods or services to which a trademark is to be applied will in no case
form an obstacle to the registration of the trademark.
12. Please describe the procedure that must be followed to register a trademark in Bolivia,
citing the relevant provisions of the law, and de scribe the rights that the owner of a registered
mark can exercise.
The procedure for registering a trademark is laid down in Articles 138 to 150 of Chapter II of
Decision 486.
9
                                                     
9 Article 138.- The application for registration of a trademark shall be filed with the competent national
office.  It shall cover a single category of goods or services and shall meet the following requirements:
(a) The petition;
(b) a reproduction of the trademark where it is a denomination containing graphic elements,
shape, or color, or a figurative, mixed or thr ee-dimensional trademark with or without the use
of color;
(c) such powers of attorney as may be needed;(d) proof of payment of the prescribed fees;
(e) the authorizations required for the cases stipulated in Articles 135 and 136, where applicable;
andIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 50
                                                                                                                                                                    
(f) the certificate of registration in the country of origin issued by the granting authority and, if so
stipulated in domestic legislation, the recei pt for payment of the prescribed fee, should
applicants wish to avail themselves of the right provided for in Article 6 quinquies of the Paris
Convention.
Article 139.- The petition for registration of the tradem ark application shall be a form and shall include
the following information:
(a) The request for registration of a trademark;
(b) the name and address of the applicant;
(c) the nationality or address of the applicant and, should the applicant be a legal entity, the place
of incorporation;
(d) the name and address of the applicant’s legal representative, if pertinent;(e) a statement of the trademark to be register ed, where such trademark is denominative only,
without graphics, shape or colour;
(f) a list of the specific goods or services for which the trademark registration application is being
filed;
(g) a statement of the category to which the products or services correspond;  and(h) the signature of the applicant or the applicant’s legal representative.
Article 140.- The date of its receipt by the competen t national office shall be co nsidered the application
filing date, provided that the application contained at least the following elements:
(a) A statement that the applicant is filing for registration of a trademark;
(b) data that shall permit identification of the applicant or person filing the application or enable
the competent national office to communicate with that person;
(c) the trademark for which registration is being applied for, or a reproduction of the trademark in
the case of trademarks that are denominations with special graphic elements, shapes or
colours, or of figurative, mixed or three-dimensional trademarks, whether in colour or not;
(d) a list of the specific goods or services in respect to which the trademark protection is being
applied for;  and
(e) proof of payment of the prescribed fees.Failure to provide any of the requirements listed in this Article shall cause the competent national
office to reject the application for processing and no filing date shall be assigned to it.
Article 141.- An applicant may claim as the filing date of an application for registration of a trademark
the date that the trademark was used to distinguish goods or services at an officially recognized exhibition held
in any country when applied for within six months following the date on which the said goods or services werefirst exhibited under that trademark.  In that case, the a pplication may be considered filed as from the date of the
exhibition.
The acts referred to in this Article shall be certified by the competent authority responsible for the
exhibition, which shall state the date on which the trademark was first used in connection with the goods or
services in question.
Article 142.- An applicant wishing to invoke the right provided for in Article 6 quinquies of the Paris
Convention for the Protection of Industrial Property shal l submit the certificate of trademark registration in the
country of origin within a period of three months after the application filing date.
Article 143.- Applicants for registration of a trademark may ask to modify their applications at any
time during their processing or to correct any material mistakes.
The competent national office may, at any stage of  the processing, suggest that applicants make
changes in their applications.  The said proposal of  amendment shall be processed in accordance with the
provisions of Article 144.
In no case may the application be amended by making important changes in the trademark or adding to
the products or services initially specified.
Fees may be prescribed for the amendment application, if domestic legislation so provides.Article 144.- The competent national office shall, within 15 days following filing, conduct an
examination to determine whether the application complies with the conditions of form specified in Articles 135and 136.
Should the examination reveal that the application does not comply with the conditions of form
specified in the preceding paragraph, the competent natio nal office shall request that the applicant to remedy
those defects within a period of sixty days following notification.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 51
13. Please provide the length and terms of protection that the trademark law of Bolivia
provides for a trademark.
Under Article 152 of Decision 486, the term of protection for a registered trademark is ten
years from the grant date and may be renewed indefinitely for successive ten-year periods.
14. Please explain how the Bolivian law provides for the protection of well-known marks for
dissimilar products, as required by Article 16.3 of  the TRIPS Agreement.  Please cite to the
relevant provisions of the laws and regulations.
Title XIII of Decision 486 provides for express protection for well-known distinctive signs in
accordance with Article 16.3 of the TRIPS Agreement.  The Decision extends the principle ofspeciality and registration since it does not deny the status of well-known because the sign is not
                                                                                                                                                                    
If the applicant fails to fulfil the requirements by the end of the stipulated term, the application shall be
rejected and shall lose its position within the order of priority.
Article 145.- If the application meets the formal conditions of form laid down in this Chapter, the
competent national office shall order its publication.
Article 146.- Within thirty days following such publication, any person having a legitimate interest
may, one time only, file a valid objection that could result in invalidation of the trademark registration.
The competent national office may, at the request of a party and once only, grant an additional thirty-
day period in which to provide valid reasons for opposing registration of the trademark.
Reckless objections may be sanctioned if provided for by domestic legislation.No objections based on such trademarks as may have existed at the same time as that being applied for,
may be lodged against the application within six months following expiry of the grace period referred to in
Article 153.
Article 147.- For the purposes of the previous Article, it shall be understood that both the owner of an
identical or similar trademark, for goods or services in respect of which use of the other trademark would belikely to lead to confusion, and the person that first applied for registration of the trademark in any Member
Country, have a legitimate interest in lodging objections in the other Member Countries.  In either case, such
opponents shall demonstrate real interest in operating in the market of the Member Country where they arefiling an objection by applying for registration of the trademark at the moment they express their opposition.
If an objection is lodged on the basis of a tradem ark previously registered in any Member Country
under the provisions of this Article, the competent national office shall have the authority to deny registry of thesecond trademark.
The filing of an objection based on an application for trademark registration previously filed in any
Member Country under the provisions of this Article shall result in the suspension of the registration of thesecond trademark until such time as the registration of the first has been conferred.  In that event, thestipulations of the previous paragraph shall be applicable.
Article 148.- The competent national office shall, in the event of any opposition having been presented,
request applicants to submit such arguments and evidence as they deem fit within thirty days following that
notification.
The competent national office shall, at the request of one of the parties, grant for one time only a period
of thirty additional days in which to provide valid reasons for the refutation.
Article 149.- The competent national office shall not accept for consideration such objections as:
(a) Are lodged without an indication being given of the essential data identifying the opponent
and the application against which the objection is being filed;
(b) are lodged after the deadlines have lapsed;(c) have not paid the prescribed processing fees.Article 150.- At the expiration of the period stipulated in Article 148, or if no objections have been
filed, the competent national office shall proceed to conduct the examination of registrability. Should anyopposition have been presented, the competent national office shall rule on those objections and on the grant or
refusal of registration of the trademark and inform the parties of its decision.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 52
registered and the owner of a well-known sign may object to products and services of different kinds
in accordance with Article 230(b):  "the persons involved in the channels of distribution or marketing
of the kinds of goods or services to which the sign shall be applied".
Similarly, where, at the request of the owner or lawful right holder, a well-known distinctive
sign has been unlawfully registered as a dominion name, the competent national authority shall order
the cancellation or amendment of the registration of the dominion name (Article 233).
Moreover, under Article 136(h), signs may not be registered if their use in commerce
constitutes an impediment to the rights of third parties, and in particular where "they consist of a total
or partial reproduction, imitation, translation, transliteration, or transcription of a well-known sign
belonging to a third party without regard to the type of product or service to which it is applied, the
use of which would lead to a likelihood of confusion or mistaken association with that party or with
its products or services;  unfair advantage is taken of the prestige of the sign;  or its distinctive force
or use for commercial or advertising purposes is weakened".
15. Please explain whether Bolivian law permits the registration of generic terms, which are
in the English or Spanish language, ci ting any relevant laws or regulations.
In accordance with Article 135(f) of Decision 486, generic signs are grounds for
non-registrability.  This provision states that:  "Signs may not be registered as trademarks … when
they consist exclusively of a sign or statement that  is the common or technical name of the product or
service concerned".  In the interpretation of this Article, if an English language sign has sufficient
distinctive capacity, it can be registered.
D. GEOGRAPHICAL INDICATIONS
16. Please describe in detail how the laws of Bolivia provide for the recognition and
protection of geographical indications required by Article 22.2 of the TRIPS Agreement, citing
to the relevant provisions of law or regulation, and provide examples of geographical
indications so protected.
Article 201 of Decision 486, in Title XII on Geographical Indications, reads as follows:  "An
appellation of origin shall be understood to be a geographical indication consisting of the name of a
particular country, region, or locality, or of a name which, without being that of a particular country,
region, or locality, refers to a specific geographical area, which name is used to identify a product
originating therein, the qualities, reputation, or characteristics of which are exclusively or essentially
attributable to the geographical environment in which it is produced, including both natural and
human factors".
At present, there are no protected geographical indications in Bolivia.
17. Please describe in detail the manner in which the higher level of protection required for
wines and spirits under Article 23.2 of the TRIPS Agreement is implemented, citing to the
relevant provisions of law or regulation, and provide examples of geographical indications for
such products.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 53
This special protection for wines and spirits is incorporated in Articles 215 to 220 of
Decision 486 of the Andean Community.10
E. INDUSTRIAL DESIGNS
18. Please describe the procedure that must be followed to obtain protection for industrial
designs, citing to the provisions of the law of Bolivia, and describe the nature of the protection
provided.
The procedure to be followed for obtaining an industrial design is laid down in Articles 117 to
127 of Title V, Chapter I of Decision 486.
As regards the nature of the protection, described in Article 113 of Decision 486, the
particular appearance of a product that results from any arrangement of lines or combination of
colours, or any two-dimensional or three-dimensi onal outward shape, line, outline, form, texture, or
material, without the intended use or purpose of the said product being thereby changed, is considered
an industrial design.
19. Please describe the procedure that must be followed to obtain protection for textile
designs and cite to the relevant provisions of law or regulation.
The procedure is the same as that for designs in general, since by virtue of their nature textiles
come within the protection of this intellectual prope rty system, to the extent that they incorporate an
arbitrary contribution by the designer.
                                                     
10 Article 215.- Member Countries shall prevent use of a geographical indication identifying wines or
spirits for goods of this kind not originating in the pl ace indicated by the appellation of origin in question, even
where the true origin of the goods is indicated or the a ppellation of origin is used in translation or accompanied
by expressions such as "kind", "type", "style", "imitation," or the like.
Member Countries may not prevent continued and similar use of a particular appellation of origin of
another country identifying wines and spirits in connection with goods or services by any of their nationals whohave used that geographical indication in a continuous manner with regard to the same or related goods orservices within the territory of the respective Member Country for at least 10 years preceding April 15, 1994 or,
in good faith, preceding that date.
Article 216.- The competent national authority shall, either ex officio or at the petition of one of the
parties, declare the authorization to use a protected appellation of origin null and void if granted in violation of
this Decision.  The provisions stipulated in this Decision in respect of trademark invalidation shall be applicablein this case, as relevant.
Article 217.- The competent national office shall, either ex officio or at the request of one of the
parties, where use not in keeping with the provisions of  the respective declaration of protection is proven, cancel
the authorization for use of the appellation of origin.  The relevant provisions stipulated in this Decision with
regard to trademark cancellation shall be applicable in this case.
Article 218.- Competent national offices shall, where the petition is made by producers, extractors,
manufacturers, or craftsmen with a legitimate interest in the matter or the respective public authorities,recognize appellations of origin protected in another Member Country.
Appellations of origin, in order to be eligible for such protection, must have been declared as such in
their countries of origin.
Article 219.- Competent national offices shall recogn ize the protection accorded by third countries to
appellations of origin or geographic indications, provided that an agreement to which the Member Country inquestion is a part so specifies.  To be eligible for such protection, those appellations of origin must have beendeclared as protected in their countries of origin.
Article 220.- Appellations of origin protected in accord ance with the stipulations of this Decision shall
not, so long as that protection obtains, be considered common or generic in distinguishing the product they
indicate.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 54
F. PATENTS
20. Please describe in detail the way in which the patent law of Bolivia implements
Article 27 of the TRIPS Agreement, indicating  any exceptions provided for, and including
details regarding the protection for micro-organisms and non-biological and microbiologicalprocesses and plant varieties.  Please cite to the relevant provisions of the law.
Article 20 of Decision 486 provides for exceptions from patentability as specified in
Article 27 of the TRIPS Agreement.
11
Micro-organisms are patentable under the second transitional provision of Decision 486
which states:  "Micro-organisms shall be patentable until other measures are adopted as a result of the
examination provided for in TRIPS Article 27.3(b)".
Within the context of Article 27.3(b) of the TRIPS Agreement, which states:  "… Members
shall provide for the protection of plant varieties either by patents or by an effective sui generis
system or by any combination thereof", in acceding to UPOV Act 78 Bolivia adopted a sui  generis
system for the protection of new varieties of plants.  At the same time, within the framework of theAndean Community, Bolivia has applied since 1993 the common provisions on new plant varieties
approved by Decision 345.
The legislation on the protection of plant breeders in force is Ministerial Resolution No.
064/96 of 9 August 1996, which specifies the rights conferred in Article 15(b):
"(b) A natural or legal person who has bred or created a new variety may request a "Title
of Ownership" which confers on its holder the right to prevent third parties from engaging,
without his consent, in the following acts in respect of reproductive, propagating or
multiplication material of the protected variety:
(1) Production, reproduction, multiplication or propagation.
(2) Preparation for the purposes of reproduction, multiplication or propagation.
(3) Offering for sale.
(4) Sale or any other act that entails placing reproductive, propagating or multiplication
material on the market for commercial purposes.
(5) Exportation.
(6) Importation.(7) Possession for any of the purposes mentioned in the foregoing subparagraphs.
                                                     
11 Article 20 of Decision 486 states that:   "The following shall not be patentable:
(a) Inventions, the prevention of the commercial exploitation within the territory of the respective
Member Country of the commercial exploitation is necessary to protect public order ormorality, provided that such exclusion is not merely because the exploitation is prohibited or
regulated by a legal or administrative provision;
(b) inventions, when the prevention of the commercial exploitation within the respective Member
Country of the commercial exploitation is necessary to protect human or animal life or health
or to avoid serious prejudice to plant life and the environment, provided that such exclusion isnot made merely because the exploitation is prohibited or regulated by a legal or
administrative provision;
(c) plants, animals, and essentially biological processes for the production of plants or animals
other than non-biological or microbiological processes;
(d) diagnostic, therapeutic, and surgical methods for the treatment of humans or animals."IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 55
(8) Commercial use of ornamental plants or parts of plants as multiplication material for
the production of ornamental and fruit plants, or parts thereof or cut flowers.
(9) The performance of the acts mentioned in the foregoing subparagraphs in respect of
harvested material, including entire plants and parts of plants, obtained through theunauthorized use of reproductive or multiplication material of the protected variety,
unless the owner has had reasonable opportunity to exercise his exclusive right in
relation to the said reproductive or multiplication material."
To be protected a variety must meet the requirements laid down in subparagraph (g):"(g) In addition to the previous requireme nts, it must comply with the following
characteristics:
(1) Be new:  a variety shall be deemed to be new if reproductive or multiplication
material or harvested material thereof ha s not been lawfully sold or otherwise
disposed of to others by or with the consent of the breeder or his successor in title forpurposes of commercial exploitation of the variety.
Novelty shall be lost where:(a) Exploitation began more than one year prior to the filing date of the application for
the grant of a proprietor's certificate or the date of any priority claimed, if sale or
disposal to others took place within the territory of Bolivia or of any Member country
of the Council of the Cartagena Agreement;
(b) exploitation began more than four years or, in the case of trees and grapevines, more
than six years prior to the filing date of the application for the grant of a proprietor's
certificate or the date of any priority claimed, if the sale or disposal took place in
territory other than that of Bolivia or a Member country of the Council of the
Cartagena Agreement;
(c) novelty shall not be lost through the sale or disposal of the variety to others,
inter alia , when those acts:
1. Are the result of abuse to the detriment of the breeder or his successor in title;2. form part of an agreement to transfer the rights in the variety, provided that
the variety has not been physically disposed of to a third party;
3. form part of an agreement under which a third party has, on behalf of the
breeder, increased supplies of reproductive or multiplication material;
4. form part of an agreement under which a third party has carried out field or
laboratory tests or small-scale processing tests with a view to the evaluation
of the variety;
5. involve harvested material that has been obtained as a by-product or surplus
product of the variety or from the activities mentioned in subparagraphs (3)and (4) of this Article;
6. are performed in any unlawful manner.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 56
(2) Be distinct:  a variety shall be deemed to be distinct if it is clearly distinguishable
from any other variety whose existence is a matter of common knowledge on the
filing date of the application or the date of any priority claimed.
The filing of an application for the grant of a title of ownership or for the entry of the
variety in an official register of cultivars shall make the said variety a matter of
common knowledge as from that date, insofar as the act concerned leads to the grant
of the title or the entry of the variety, as the case may be.
(3) Be uniform:  a variety shall be deemed to be uniform if it is sufficiently uniform in its
essential characteristics, with account for the system of reproduction or
multiplication.
(4) Be stable:  in its essential characteristics, that is to say that at the end of each
multiplication cycle it should retain the characteristics described by its breeder".
The term of protection is specified in subparagraph (h):
"(h) The term of the "Title of Ownership" shall be 25 years in the case of vines, forest
trees and fruit trees, including their rootstocks, and 20 years for other species,
calculated in both cases from the date of grant".
21. Please describe in detail the rights provided patent holders under the patent law of
Bolivia and cite to the relevant provisions of law.
Patents have a term of 20 years from the filing date of the corresponding application in the
Member country, in favour of the owner.
The scope of the protection conferred by a patent is determined by the wording of the claims
and the description and drawings or, where appropriate, biological material deposited, which are used
for interpreting the claims.
At the same time, under Article 52 of Decision 486, a patent confers on its owner the right to
prevent third parties not having the owner's consent from the following acts:
(a) Where the subject-matter of a patent is a product:
(i) Making the product;
(ii) offering for sale, selling, or using the product, or importing it for these
purposes;  and
(b) Where the subject-matter of the patent is a process:
(i) Using the process;  or
(ii) carrying out any of the acts specified under subparagraph (a) above with
respect to a product obtained directly by that process.
22. Please describe in detail any provisions in the laws of Bolivia permitting unauthorized
use of a patent, citing to the relevant provisions of law, and describe in detail the conditions
under which such use can occur.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 57
The unauthorized use of patents is described in  Articles 61-69 of Chapter VII of Decision 486
on the compulsory licensing regime.12
                                                     
12 Article 61.- At the expiry of a period of three years following a patent grant or of four years
following the application for a patent, whichever is longer, the competent national office may grant a
compulsory licence mainly for the industrial manufacture of the product covered by the patent, or for full use ofthe patented process, at the request of any interested party, but only if, at the time of the request, the patent had
not been exploited in the manner specified in Articles 59 and 60, in the Member Country in which the licence is
sought, or if the exploitation of the invention had been suspended for more than one year.
Compulsory licences shall not be granted if patent owners are able to give valid reasons for their failure
to act, which may be reasons of force majeure or an act of God, in accordance with the domestic provisions ineffect in each Member Country.
A compulsory licence shall be granted only if, prior to applying for it, the proposed user has made
efforts to obtain a contractual licence from the patent holder on reasonable commercial terms and conditions and
that such efforts were not successful within a reasonable period of time.
Article 62.- Decisions to grant a compulsory licence, as stipulated in the previous Article, shall be
taken after the patent owners have been notified to present their arguments as they see fit within the followingsixty days.
The competent national office shall specify the scope or  coverage of the licence, and in particular shall
specify the period for which it is granted, the subject-matter of the licence, the amount of the remuneration, and
the conditions for the payment thereof.  The remuneratio n shall be set at an adequate level in accordance with
the individual circumstances of each case and, in particular, the economic value of the authorization.
Opposition to a compulsory licence shall not prevent it s exploitation or have any effect on any periods
that may be running.  The filing of an objection shall not prevent the patent owner, in the meantime, fromcollecting the remuneration specified by the competent na tional office on the part unaffected by the objection.
Article 63.- At the request of the owner of the patent or the licencee, the conditions governing the
compulsory licence may be changed by the competent national office where new circumstances so dictate and,in particular, when the patent holder grants another licence on terms that are more favorable than the existingones.
Article 64.- The licencee shall exploit the licenced invention within a period of two years following the
date the licence was granted, unless that licencee is able to give valid reasons for inaction consisting of force
majeure or an act of God.  Otherwise, at the patent owner’s request, the competent national office shall revokethe compulsory licence.
Article 65.- Following the declaration by a Member Country of the existence of public interest, an
emergency, or national security considerations, and only for so long as those considerations exist, the patent
may be subject to compulsory licensing at any time.  In that case, the competent national office shall grant the
licences that are applied for.  The owner of the patent so licenced shall be notified as soon as is reasonably
possible.
The competent national office shall specify the scope or extent of the compulsory licence and, in
particular, the term for which it is granted, the subject-matter of the licence, and the amount of remuneration andthe conditions for its payment.
The grant of a compulsory licence for reasons of public interest shall not reduce the right of the patent
owner to continue exploiting it.
Article 66.- The competent national office may, either ex officio or at the request of a party, and after
having obtained the consent of the national antitrust authority, grant compulsory licences where practices arenoted that are detrimental to the exercise of free competition, especially where they constitute an abuse by thepatent owner of a dominant position in the market.
The need to correct anti-competitive practices shall be taken into account in determining the amount of
remuneration to be paid in such cases.
The competent national office shall refuse termination of a compulsory licence if and when the
conditions which led to the granting of the licence are likely to recur.
Article 67.- The competent national office shall grant a licence, upon request by the owner of a patent
whose exploitation necessarily requires the use of another patent, and that right holder has been unable to secure
a contractual licence to the other patent on reasonable commercial terms.  That licence shall, without prejudice
to the provisions of Article 68, be subject to the following conditions:IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 58
23. What term of protection does the patent law of Bolivia provide for patents?  Please
describe any provisions for extension of the term of protection and cite to the relevant
provisions of the law.
The term of protection for patents is 20 years from the filing date of the application
(Article 50 of Decision 486).
The legislation does not make any provision for extension of the term of protection.
G. LAYOUT -DESIGNS (TOPOGRAPHIES ) OF INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
24. Please describe in detail the protection for layout-designs of integrated circuits provided
under the laws of Bolivia, including the term of protection, and cite to the relevant provisions of
law.
Provisions concerning the protection of layout-designs of integrated circuits are contained in
Articles 86-112 of Title IV of Decision 486.13
                                                                                                                                                                    
(a) The invention claimed in the second patent shall involve an important technical advance of
considerable economic significan ce in relation to the invention claimed in the first patent;
(b) the owner of the first patent shall be entitled to a cross-licence on reasonable terms to use the
invention claimed in the second patent;  and
(c) the licence authorized in respect of the first patent shall be non-assignable except with the
assignment of the second patent.
Article 68.- In addition to the conditions provided for in the preceding articles, compulsory licences
shall be subject to the following:
(a) They shall be non-exclusive and may not be sublicensed;
(b) they shall be non-assignable, except with the part of the business or goodwill which permits
its industrial use.  This shall be evidenced in writing and registered with the competentnational office.  Otherwise, those assignments or transfers shall not be legally binding;
(c) they shall be liable, subject to adequate protection of the legitimate interests of the persons so
authorized, to be terminated if and when the circumstances which led to them cease to exist
and are unlikely to recur;
(d) their scope and duration shall be limited to the purposes for which they were authorized;(e) in the case of patents protecting semiconductor technology, a compulsory licence shall be
authorized only for public non-commercial us e or to remedy a practice declared by the
competent national authority to be anti-com petitive in accordance with Articles 65 and 66;
(f) they provide for payment of adequate remu neration according to the circumstances of each
case, taking into account the economic value of the licence, without prejudice to thestipulations of Article 66;  and
(g) they shall be used predominantly for the supply of the domestic market.Article 69.- Compulsory licences that fail to comply with the provisions of this Chapter shall be devoid
of any legal effect whatsoever.
13 CHAPTER I
Definitions.
Article 86.- The following definitions shall apply for purposes of this Title:
(a) Integrated circuit:  a product, in final or intermediate form, of which at least one element is an
active element and some or all of whose interconnections are an integral part of the body orsurface of a piece of material that is intended to be used electronically;
(b) layout-design: the three-dimensional arrangement of the elements, regardless of form, of
which at least one is an active element, and their interconnection into an integrated circuit, aswell as that three-dimensional arrangement prepared for use in an integrated circuit to be
manufactured.
CHAPTER IIIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 59
                                                                                                                                                                    
On the Requirements for Protection of Layout-designs of Integrated Circuits
Article 87.- A layout-design shall be protected if it is an original design.
A layout-design shall be considered original when it is the result of its creator’s intellectual efforts and
is not in common use in the integrated circuit industry.
Where composed of two or more elements in common use in the integrated circuit industry, a layout-
design shall be considered original only if the comb ination of those elements, as an assembly, meets this
requirement.
CHAPTER III
On the Right HoldersArticle 88.- The right to register a layout-design of an integrated circuit belongs to its designer.  That
right may be assigned or transferred by succession.
If two or more persons jointly prepare a layout-design, those persons shall share the right to protect it.The right to protection of a layout-design created und er a project or service contract entered into for
this purpose or within the framework of an employment relationship in which the designer has such function,
shall correspond to the person who contracted for the project or service, or the employer, unless otherwise
stipulated under a contract.
CHAPTER IVOn the Application for RegistrationArticle 89.- The application to register a layout-design of an integrated circuit shall be filed with the
competent national office and shall contain the following information:
(a) The petition;(b) a copy or drawing of the layout-design and, if commercially exploited, a sample of that
integrated circuit;
(c) if pertinent, a statement of the date of first commercial exploitation of the integrated circuit
anywhere in the world;
(d) if pertinent, the statement of the y ear the integration circuit was created;
(e) a description of the electronic operation to be performed by the integrated circuit in the layout-
design;
(f) copies of any applications for registration or other protection filed for or obtained abroad by
the applicants or their assignees, referring to all or part of the layout-design for which a
registration application is being filed in the Member Country;
(g) such powers of attorney as may be needed;  and(h) a proof of payment of the prescribed fee.Article 90.- The petition to register an application for a layout-design of an integrated circuit shall be a
form and shall include the following information:
(a) The request for the registration;
(b) the name and address of the applicant;
(c) the nationality or address of the applicant and, if the applicant is a juridical person, the site of
incorporation;
(d) the name and address of the creator of the layout-design, if a person other than the applicant;(e) the name and address of the applicant’s legal representative, if pertinent;(f) the date, number, and office where any other application for registration or other protection
was filed or obtained abroad by the applicant or assignee in respect of all or part of the same
layout-design being applied for in the Member Country, if pertinent;  and
(g) the signature of the applicant or the applicant’s legal representative.
Article 91.- Where the layout-design for which a registration application has been filed includes an
industrial secret, the applicant shall file, in addition to  the graphic representation required, a representation of
the lay-out omitting, erasing, or distorting the parts containi ng that secret.  It is necessary for the remaining parts
to be sufficient to allow for identification of the layout-design.
Article 92.- The date of reception of an application by the competent national office shall be considered
its filing date, provided that the application contained at least the following elements:
(a) An express or implicit statement that the application is being filed for the registration of a
layout-design;
(b) data that shall permit identification of the applicant or person filing the application or enable
the competent national office to communicate with that person;
(c) a graphic representation of the layout-design for which registration is being applied for;  andIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 60
                                                                                                                                                                    
(d) the proof of payment of the prescribed fees.
Failure to comply with any one of the requirements specified in this Article shall result in refusal by the
competent national to process the application and no filing date shall be assigned to it.
CHAPTER VOn the Processing of the ApplicationArticle 93.- The competent national office shall examine whether the subject-matter of the application
constitutes a layout-design as defined in Article 86 and whether the application contains the information
requested in Articles 89, 90, and 91.  The competent national office shall not examine the originality of the
layout-design ex officio, unless reasoned oppos ition to the applicatio n has been presented.
Should any omission or defect be noted, the applicant shall be admonished to make the necessary
correction within a period of three months, and that failure to do so shall be considered abandonment and shallbe placed in the archives ex officio.  If the applicant does not make the correction within the allotted period, the
competent national office shall make that warn ing effective through a reasoned decision.
Article 94.- Having examined the application, the competent national office shall order its
announcement through the publication in the official govern ment gazette of a notice to be paid by the interested
party.
The pertinent provisions in respect of applications for investment patents shall be applicable to the
publication of the notice.
Article 95.- Any interested person may lodge a substantiated objection with the competent national
office, including information and documents that would be useful for ascertaining the registerability of a layout-
design.
Pertinent provisions in respect of applications for invention patents shall be applicable to the
objections.
Article 96.- If the stipulated requirements are fulfilled, the competent national office shall register the
layout-design and issue a registration certificate containing the data included in the corresponding registry.
CHAPTER VIOn the Rights conferred by RegistrationArticle 97.- If the layout-design has been exploited commercially anywhere in the world, the
application for registration shall be filed with the co mpetent national office of the Member Country concerned
within a period of two years from its first commercial expl oitation.  If the application is filed after the expiration
of that period, the registration shall be denied.
A layout-design not having been commercially exploited anywhere in the world may be registered only
if applied for to a competent national office of a Member Country no later than 15 years after the last day of theyear the lay-out was created.  If the application is filed after that period has expired, its registration shall bedenied.
Article 98.- Exclusive rights over a registered layout-design shall have a duration of ten years from the
oldest of the following dates:
(a) The last day of the year the layout-design was first commercially exploited anywhere in the
world;  or
(b) the filing date of an application for registration with the competent national office of the
Member Country concerned.
The term of protection of a registered layout-design shall lapse in any case at the conclusion of a period
of 15 years counted from the last day of the year in which the layout-design was created.
Article 99.- The protection shall be applied irrespective of whether the integrated circuit in which the
protected layout-design has been incorporated has been  manufactured and irrespective of whether the layout-
design has been incorporated into an integrated circuit.
Registration of a layout-design of an integrated circuit confers on its holder the right to impede third
persons from performing any of the following acts:
(a) Reproducing, through incorporation into an inte grated circuit or in any other way, all or part
of the protected layout-design that complies with the requirements for originality stipulated inArticle 87;
(b) marketing, importing, offering for sale, selling, or otherwise distributing a protected layout-
design or an integrated circuit in which a protected layout-design is incorporated;  or
(c) marketing, importing, offering for sale, selling, or otherwise distributing an article
incorporating such a protected integrated circu it, only insofar as it continues to contain an
unlawfully reproduced layout-design.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 61
                                                                                                                                                                    
Protection conferred by registration shall cover only the layout-design itself, and shall not extend to
any idea, process, system, technique, or data encoded or incorporated into the layout-design.
Article 100.- The right conferred by registration of the layout-design only may be asserted against acts
having industrial or commercial purposes.  Registration shall not confer the right to impede the following acts:
(a) Acts carried out in a private circle and for non-commercial purposes;(b) acts carried out exclusively for purposes of evaluation, analysis, or experimentation;(c) acts carried out exclusively for purposes of  teaching or scientific or academic research;
(d) acts referred to in Article 5 of the Paris Convention for the Protection of Industrial Property.
Article 101.- Registration of a layout-design shall not give the holder the right to prevent third parties
from engaging in acts of commerce in respect of registered layout-designs, integrated circuits in which aprotected layout-design is incorporated , or articles containing those integrated circuits after the introduction of
the layout-design into the commerce of any country by the right holder or by any other person with the consentof or having economic ties to that right holder.
For purposes of the preceding paragraph, two person s shall be considered to have economic ties when
one of the persons is able to exercise a decisive influe nce over the other, either directly or indirectly, with
respect to exploitation of the layout-design, or when a third party is able to exert that influence over bothpersons.
Article 102.- The right holder to a registered layout-design may not prevent a third party from engaging
in acts of industrial or commercial exploitation in respect of a layout-design created by another person through
the evaluation or analysis of the protected layout-desig n, where the layout-design thereby created fulfils the
requirements for originality stipulated in Article 87.  Nor may that right holder prevent those acts in respect ofintegrated circuits in which the layout-designs so creat ed are incorporated or of articles incorporating those
integrated circuits.
Article 103.- The right holder of a registered layout-design may not prevent a third party from carrying
out the acts cited in Article 99 with respect to another layout-design originally created by a third party, even if
identical.
Article 104.- Performance of any of the acts referred to in Article 99 in respect of an integrated circuit
incorporating an unlawfully reproduced layout-design or any article incorporating su ch an integrated circuit
shall not be considered an infringement of rights to a registered design, where the person performing or orderingsuch acts did not know and had no reasonable ground to know, when acquiring the integrated circuit or article
incorporating such an integrated circuit, that it incor porated an unlawfully reproduced layout-design.  After the
time that such person has received sufficient notice that the layout-design was unlawfully produced, that personmay continue to perform any of the acts with respect to the stock on hand or ordered before such time, but shallbe liable to pay the right holder a sum equivalent to a reasonable royalty such as would be payable under afreely negotiated licence in respect of such layout-design.
Article 105.- A layout-design registration that has been granted or is being processed may be assigned
or transferred by succession.
Any assignment or transfer of a layout-design registration shall be filed with the competent national
office.  Failure to register that assignment or transfer shall render it legally invalid in respect of third parties.
Assignments or transfers, in order to be registered, shall be in writing.Any interested person may apply for registration of an assignment or transfer.CHAPTER VII
On the Licensing System
Article 106.- The right holder for a layout-design that is registered or for which registration has been
filed may licence one or more parties to exploit that layout-design.
Any licence to use the layout-design shall be register ed with the competent national office.  Failure to
register the licence shall render it invalid with respect to third parties.
Licences, in order to be registered, shall be in writing.  Any interested party may file for registration of
a licence.
The registered right holder shall inform the competent national office of any change in the name or
address of the registered layout-design right holder during the term of the licensing contract.  Otherwise, anynotification that may be made on the basis of the data entered in the registry shall be considered valid.
Article 107.- The competent national authority may, given a lack of exploitation or for reasons of
public interest, in particular a national emergency, or for public health or natural security  considerations, or to
remedy an anti-competitive practice, and at the request of an interested party or of a competent authority, order
the following at any time:IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 62
H. UNDISCLOSED INFORMATION
25. Please describe in detail how the laws of Bolivia provide for the protection of
undisclosed information as required by Article 39.2 of the TRIPS Agreement and providecitations to the relevant provisions of law.
                                                                                                                                                                    
(a) That layout-designs that are registered or for which registration has been filed shall be used or
exploited industrially or commercially by a government institution or by one or more public or
private legal entities that have been expressly appointed to do so;  or
(b) that the said layout-design shall be subject to the granting of one or more compulsory licences,
in which case the competent authority may grant such a licence to any person who applies forit, subject to the conditions that have been stipulated for that purpose.
The conditions that have been stipulated for granting compulsory licences with respect to invention
patents shall be applicable to the granting of a compulsory licences in regard to a layout-design.
CHAPTER VIIIOn the Invalidation of the RegistrationArticle 108.- The competent national authority may, either ex officio or at the request of a party and at
any time, declare the registration of a layout-design null and void, where:
(a) The subject-matter of the registration is no t a layout-design accordin g to the requirements
stipulated in Article 86;
(b) the registration fails to comply with the requirements for protection set forth in Article 87;(c) the registration was granted for a layout-design applied for after the expiration of one of the
periods established in Article 97;  or
(d) there are grounds for declaring the regist ration to be null and void according to domestic
legislation covering administrative acts.
Where the grounds specified above are applicable to on ly a part of the layout-design, invalidation shall
be pronounced only in respect of that part, as pertinent, leaving the registration valid for the other parts,provided that as a whole the layout-design complies with the requirements for originality stipulated inArticle 87.
The layout-design or the part of it that has been invalidated shall be deemed null and void as of the
filing date of the application for its registration.
Article 109.- Where defects in administrative acts fail to produce absolute invalidation as specified in
the preceding article, those acts shall be invalidated relatively.  In such cases, the competent national authoritymay, in conformity with domestic legislation, declare them null and void within a period of five years countedfrom the date of registration.
Article 110.- The competent national authority may, where a layout-design registration has been
granted to a person that has no right to it, annul that  registration.  The invalida tion proceeding may be brought
only by the person with a right to registration of that layout-design.  That right of action shall lapse five yearsfrom the date the registration was granted or two years following the date on which the person to whom thatright belongs learned about the marketing in the Member Country of the product incorporating that layout-design, whichever period expires first.
Article 111.- In invalidation proceedings, the competen t national authority shall request registered right
holders to present their arguments and submit the proof they deem advisable.
Where that authority, under the domestic law of a Member Country, is the competent national office,
the registered right holder shall present the arguments and submit the proof referred to in the previous article
within a period of two months following notification.
Before the expiration of the period stipulated in the previous article, the interested party may request an
extension of two additional months.
Once the periods stipulated in this article have expired, the competent national office shall rule on the
invalidation of the registration and notify the parties of its decision.
Article 112.- The competent national authority may, where necessary to rule on the invalidation of a
registration, request the right holder to submit one or more of the documents referred to in Article 89 withregard to the registration that is the subject-matter of the proceeding.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 63
The provisions on the protection of industrial secrets are contained in Articles 260 to 266 of
Title XVI, Chapter II, of Decision 486:
"Article 260.- An industrial secret shall be considered to be any undisclosed information
within the lawful control of an individual person or legal entity that may be used for any
productive, industrial, or commercial activity and that is capable of being transmitted to a
third party, so long as that information:
(a) Is secret in the sense that it is not, as a body or in the precise configuration and
assembly of its components, generally known among or readily accessible to persons
within the circles that normally deal with the kind of information in question;
(b) has commercial value because it is secret;  and(c) has been the subject of reasonable steps by the person lawfully in control of the
information, to keep it secret.
The information constituting an industrial secret may be related to the nature, characteristics,
or purpose of the products, production methods or processes, or the means or forms of
distribution or marketing of goods or rendering of services.
Article 261.- For purposes of this Decision, information whose disclosure is the result of a
legal provision or court order shall not be considered an industrial secret.
Information provided to any authority or disclosed by legal provision by the person in lawful
possession of it shall not be considered public property if that person supplies the informationfor the purpose of obtaining licences, permits, authorizations, registrations, or any other legal
acts.
Article 262.- Persons shall have the possibility of preventing an industrial secret lawfully
within their control from being disclosed to, acquired by, or used by third parties in a manner
contrary to fair trade practices. Performance of any of the following acts in respect of an
industrial secret shall be considered unfair competition:
(a) Using, without the authorization of the person lawfully in control of that information,
an industrial secret to which the third party had access under a confidentiality
obligation resulting from a contractual or labour trade practice;
(b) communicating or disclosing, without the consent of the personal lawfully in control
of that information, the industrial secret referred in subsection (a) with the intent of
obtaining advantages for oneself or another party or of causing injury to the person in
control of that information;
(c) acquiring an industrial secret by means that are unlawful or contrary to fair practice
practices;
(d) using, communicating, or disclosing an industrial secret acquired in the way
described in subsection (c);
(e) using an industrial secret obtained from another person, while knowing, or
negligently failing to know, that the part y who communicated the secret had acquiredIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 64
it by use of the means cited under subsection (c), or did not have consent to
communicate it from the person lawfully in control of that information;
(f) communicating or disclosing an industrial  secret obtained in the way described under
subsection (e), for the benefit of oneself or a third party or to injure the person
lawfully in control of that industrial secret.
An industrial secret shall be considered to have been acquired by means contrary to
fair trade practices where such acquisition is the result of industrial espionage, breach
of contract or other obligations, breach of trust, breach of a duty of secrecy, or
inducement to breach.
Article 263.- Protection of an industrial secret shall last so long as the conditions set out in
Article 260 exist.
Article 264.- Any person lawfully in control of a trade secret may transfer it to a third party or
authorize its use by a third party. That authorized user shall be under the obligation not to
disclose the industrial secret by any means, unless otherwise agreed with the person having
transferred or authorized use of that secret.
Agreements for the transfer of technological k now-how, technical assistance, or the provision
of basic or detailed engineering may include confidentiality clauses to protect the trade secrets
contained therein, provided that such clauses are not contrary to antitrust provisions on free
competition.
Article 265.- Persons with access to an industrial secret by reason of their work, employment,
job, professional performance, or business relationship and warned of the confidentiality
thereof, shall refrain from making use of it or disclosing it without just cause and without the
consent of the owner or authorized user of that secret.
Article 266.- Member Countries, when requiring, as a condition for approving the marketing
of pharmaceutical or of agricultural chemical products which utilize new chemical entities,
the submission of undisclosed test or other data, the origination of which involves aconsiderable effort, shall protect such data against unfair commercial use. In addition,
Member Countries shall protect such data against disclosure, except where necessary to
protect the public or unless steps are taken to ensure that the data is protected against unfair
commercial use."
26. Please describe in detail the manner in which protection is provided test data regarding
pharmaceutical and agricultural chemical prod ucts submitted to the government in order to
obtain marketing approval in Bolivia and cite to the relevant provisions of law.
Protection is provided by Article 266 of Decision 486, which reads:  "… when requiring, as a
condition for approving the marketing of pharmaceutical or of agricultural chemical products whichutilize new chemical entities, the submission of undisclosed test or other data, the origination of which
involves a considerable effort, shall protect such data against unfair commercial use.  In addition,
Member countries shall protect such data against disclosure, except where necessary to protect the
public or unless steps are taken to ensure that the data is protected against unfair commercial use".
In granting marketing approval for a pharmaceutical, the health authority does not require
documents specifying the manufacturing process or procedure, so that the applicant does not have
submitted data that involve a considerable effort.  Thus, there is no risk of disclosure of informationIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 65
that could be used by a later applicant or by the authority itself.  All that is required is a description of
the active and inactive ingredients.
The health authorities which approve the marketing of pharmaceutical and agricultural
chemical products are non-profit-making public sector entities that perform a function expressly
entrusted to them by law.  In this respect, it is understood that the use made by these authorities of the
data at their disposal, whatever its origin, within th eir own institutions and in fulfilment of their legal
duty to approve the marketing of such products, does not constitute commercial or unfair use.  The
data are used for government, not commercial pur poses and the use is by definition lawful since
required by the laws that govern the terms of reference and operation of these authorities.  Moreover,
the use of the data within these institutions does no t involve any disclosure to third parties, since the
latter never have access to the data in question, under Article 265 of Decision 486.
27. Are other applicants for ma rketing approval for their own versions of a previously
approved pharmaceutical or agricultural chemical products permitted to rely on data submitted
by the earlier applicant?  If so, how long a period of exclusivity is given the earlier applicantbefore such reliance becomes possible.
Anyone has the right to apply for and obtain from the competent authorities marketing
approval for their own versions of a previously approved pharmaceutical or agricultural chemical
product, provided that they comply with the provis ions of the relevant legislation.  The authority
authorizing marketing cannot discriminate between earlier and later applicants, being required to treatall as equal under the law.
Under Article 266 of Decision 486, the authority approving marketing may not allow third
parties access to undisclosed test or other data, the origination of which involved a considerable effort
and which was provided by another (apart from the exceptions provided for in Article 266 itself,which corresponds to Article 39.3 of the TRIPS Agreem ent).  This protection is indefinite and will be
provided as long as the necessary conditions are met.
However, the authorities which approve the marketing of pharmaceutical and agricultural
chemical products perform a function expressly entrusted to them by law.  In this respect, it is
understood that the use of the data by these authorities within their own institutions and in fulfilment
of their legal duties, does not involve the disclosure of those data, whatever their origin, in as much asthird parties are not allowed access to them, other than in the exceptional cases indicated in
Article 266 of Decision 486.
In this connection, if the authority had already approved the marketing of an earlier product,
and someone else were to request approval for an identical later product and that person compliedwith the requirements of the relevant legislation, the authority would be obliged to approve that later
product also.  In order to determine whether the later product complied with the requirements of the
legislation, the authority would be able to make internal use of any information available to it.
It should be noted that to the extent that the marketing approval procedure for which the law
provides does not require the submission of undisclose d test or other data in the origination of which
considerable effort was involved, the above-men tioned Article 266 (which corresponds to Article 39.3
of the TRIPS Agreement) will not be applicable.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 66
I. ENFORCEMENT – GENERAL OBLIGATIONS , PROCEDURES , CIVIL AND ADMINISTRATIVE
REMEDIES AND PROVISIONAL MEASURES
28. Please describe in detail the manner in which the laws of Bolivia provide for effective
action against infringement of intellectual prop erty rights as required by Article 41.1 of the
TRIPS Agreement.
As regards the procedures for the enforcement of intellectual property rights required by
Article 41.1 of the TRIPS Agreement, Bolivia has incorporated in its domestic legislation civil,
criminal and administrative procedures and alternative methods of dispute settlement for the
appropriate application and enforcement of intellectual property rights.  In this connection, Bolivia
applies the provisions of substantive law and special laws and regulations on the protection of
copyright and related rights, industrial property and new varieties of plants, together with theadjectival provisions of the Civil and Penal Codes and the Codes of Civil and Criminal Procedure and
administrative regulations.  The enforcement provisions of Andean Decisions 344, 345, 351, 391 and
486 are also applied in Bolivia.
29. Article 43.1 of the TRIPS Agreement requires that judges be authorized to order
production of evidence necessary to substantiate a party’s claims where that party has been
unable to obtain such evidence from the opposi ng party.  Please describe how the laws or
regulations of Bolivia provide this authorizatio n, citing to the relevant provisions of law or
regulation.
Under the Code of Civil Procedure, whenever acts must be proven, the court may, even
without the agreement of the parties and although they do not so request, establish a period for the
taking of evidence that may not be less than ten days or more than fifty, depending on the proceeding
involved.  Appeal against the court's decision lies with a higher court (Code of Civil Procedure,
Article 370).
In taking evidence, the court shall, in an express order, specify the facts to be proven.  The
parties may object to the order within the third day of the proceeding and the order shall then require
immediate resolution.  It shall be open to appeal by  transfer to a higher court, without further appeal
(Code of Civil Procedure, Article 371).
All methods of submitting legal evidence and those that can be justified morally even though
not specified in the Code of Civil Procedure are accepted.  Parties have the right to verify the truth ofthe facts on which the action or the defence is based (Code of Civil Procedure, Article 373, in
conjunction with the Civil Code, Article 1285).
Legal evidence includes:  documents, confession, judicial inspection, expertise, deposition,
and presumption (Code of Civil Procedure, Article 374).
The burden of proof lies (1) with the claimant in regard to the act creating his right and
(2) with the defendant in regard to the existence of the act impeding, modifying or extinguishing the
claimant's rights (Code of Ci vil Procedure, Article 375).
The period for the submission of evidence, for the parties to the proceeding, shall be fixed by
the court.  Outside that period, evidence shall be rejected ex officio , except in the case of proof by
documents prepared for that purpose or covered by Article 331, which relates to unknown earlier or
later documents.  In this regard, it is established that, after the complaint has been made, only
documents of a later date will be accepted or, if they are earlier, only if it is affirmed under oath thatthey were unknown.  In such cases, the opposing party will be notified for the purposes of Article 46,IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 67
paragraph 2, which means that a decision must be taken on the accompanying documents or those
cited in the complaint.  Silence, evasion or a mere general denial may be regarded as
acknowledgement of the truth of the facts referred to in those documents (Code of Civil Procedure,
Articles 377, 331 and 346.2).
If evidence is to be produced outside the Republic, the court shall commission the
corresponding judicial authority, provided any of the following circumstances apply:
(1) The fact to be proven has occurred outside the Republic;
(2) the archives or offices containing the documents are abroad;
(3) the person required to make a statement lives abroad (Code of Civil Procedure,
Article 385).
For the purpose of receiving such evidence, a special period shall be established in the light of
the distance and the means of transport available.  This period shall not exceed 60 to 120 days,
depending on whether or not a neighbouring country is involved.  The decision on the special periodshall not be open to appeal;  a decision refusing such period shall be open to appeal by transfer of
jurisdiction, without further appeal (Code of Civil Procedure, Article 386 in conjunction with
Articles 370 and 383).
In the case of evidence for criminal proceedings, the established principle is freedom to
submit evidence and it is specified that the cour t shall admit all legal evidence that may lead to
discovery of the historical truth of the facts and th e responsibility and identity of the accused.  Other
means may be used in addition to those provided for in this section of the Code.  Their incorporation
in the proceedings shall be subject to a similar evidential procedure.
Evidence shall be admitted if it relates, direct ly or indirectly, to the subject-matter of the
investigation and helps to reveal the truth.  The court will place restrictions on evidence submitted
when it is clearly excessive or irrelevant (New Code of Criminal Procedure, Article 171).
Articles 174 to 192 of the New Code of Criminal Procedure establish the procedure for
immediate verification and the following auxiliary measures:
• Inspection of the scene of the crime
• Body search
• Vehicle search
• Removal and identification of bodies
• Autopsy and necropsy
• On-the-spot investigation and reconstruction
• House search
• Coercive powers for the police
• Search and seizure warrant (for exceptions see New Code of Criminal Procedure,
Article 185).
Legal evidence consists of the following:  testimony.  In this case, if the witness does not
answer the first summons, a warrant will be issued  to apprehend him, without prejudice to further
indictment.  If, after appearing, he refuses to make a statement, an order shall be issued for him to beIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 68
detained for up to 24 hours, after which, if he continues to refuse, criminal proceedings will be
brought against him (New Code of Criminal Procedure, Article 198).  In the case of defiance of
authority or resistance to authority, the penalties are a fine and one month to one year's imprisonment
(Penal Code, Articles 159 and 160).
Evidence may be taken on commission when the witness does not live in the judicial district
where he is to make a statement and cannot be present, in which case a letter of request or instruction
is issued to the judicial authority of his place of residence (New Code of Criminal Procedure,
Article 199).
An expert examination is another means used to discover or assess evidence where
specialized knowledge is required of some science, art or technique.
Law No. 2175, on the Department of Public Prosecutions, establishes that, for the purpose of
fulfilling the Department's functions (prosecution, functional administration of police action in the
investigation of offences and monitoring the legality  of such investigations), any person, institution or
office, public or private, is required to provide the information demanded by the Department of Public
Prosecutions and is liable as established in the Penal Code (defiance of authority and resistance to
authority, with a penalty of a fine and one month to one year's imprisonment, Penal Code, Articles
159 and 160).
30. Please describe in detail all of the civil remedies that are available to right holders under
the laws of Bolivia, citing to the relevant provisions of law or regulation.
The Code of Civil Procedure establishes clear and precise rules for the handling and
settlement of disputes submitted to the country's ordinary courts.
The civil proceedings available are set out systematically below:
1. Courts.  Courts of first and second instance exist throughout Bolivian territory,
covering not only the departmental capitals (cities), but also the provinces and
cantons throughout the Republic.  These are the judicial authorities with jurisdiction
over civil cases for settling rightholders' disputes.
2. Parties.  Provision is made for the intervention and capacity of the main parties
involved, such as plaintiff, defendant and judge.
Public prosecutors may also intervene when representing the State as plaintiff or defendant,
together with auxiliary officials of the judicial system.
Attorneys, experts, interpreters, trustees, administrators, auctioneers and commissioners may
also participate.
Legally constituted companies, together with corporations, self-governing and autonomous
entities, cooperatives and communities, may participate through their legal representatives (Code of
Civil Procedure, Article 56).
Under authorized representation, persons appearing in the proceeding on behalf of or as
representatives of someone else must attach to the first submission the documents proving their status(Code of Criminal Procedure, Article 58).IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 69
When the status has been accepted, the agent assumes all liability under the law and his acts
are as binding on the principal as if the principal were carrying them out in person (Code of Civil
Procedure, Article 60).
Powers of attorney granted abroad must be registered with the Public Notary's Office after
authentication by the Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Worship, in accordance with the Law on
Notarial Deeds.
Without prejudice to civil or criminal liability, the agent shall be accountable to his principal
for costs incurred as a result of his exclusive fault or negligence.  The court may, depending on the
circumstances, establish the joint liability of principal and agent (Code of Civil Procedure, Article 64).
There are provisions governing cases of contempt of court, dispossession and cases in which
it is appropriate to award costs.
3. Commissioning of other authorities.  When a judge has to implement some measure within
his jurisdiction and is unable to do so personally, he may entrust it to other judicial or, failing that,
administrative authorities.
If judicial measures have to be carried out outside his jurisdiction but within the national
territory, the judge shall petition courts of equal status and issue instructions to those of lower status.If it is necessary to have recourse to an authority outside the Republic, it shall be done by letters
rogatory (Code of Civil Procedure, Articles 113 and 114).
4. Precautionary measures.  Before a complaint is submitted or in the course of the proceeding,
the following precautionary measures may be requested:
• Preventive filing of the application;
• preventive embargo;
• seizure;
• intervention;
• prohibition on entering into contracts concerning specified goods (in accordance with
the Civil Code, Article 1444) (Code of Criminal Procedure, Article 156).
Apart from the precautionary measures mentioned above, anyone who has good grounds to
believe that, in the period preceding official acknowledgement of his right, he may suffer imminent orirreparable damage may request those urgent measures which, depending on the circumstances, are
best suited to ensuring provisional compliance with the judgement (Code of Civil Procedure,
Article 169).
To avoid unnecessary injury or harm to the owner of the goods, the court may place limits on
the precautionary measure requested or apply another measure, depending on the importance of the
right it is intended to protect.
If there is a risk of the goods concerned being lost or their value being reduced or if they are
expensive or difficult to preserve, at the request of one of the parties and after informing the other
party the court may, within a period established in accordance with the urgency of the case, order that
the goods be sold in the most appropriate manner while expediting the formalities and setting datesand times (Articles 170 and 171).IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 70
In order for a precautionary measure to be applied, the applicant must post security for any
costs or damages that could arise if the request were found to be unjustified.
Provisional measures are temporary and last only as long as the circumstances that gave rise
to them;  whenever those circumstances cease to exist, an order lifting the measures may be issued.
Provisional measures also lapse automatically if, in the case of demand liabilities, a complaint
is not filed within five days following the date of enforcement (Code of Civil Procedure, Article 177).
5. Conciliation is possible in civil cases and may take place prior to or during the court
proceedings (in conjunction with Civil Code, Article 945) (Code of Civil Procedure, Article 180).6. Penalty for failure to comply with a court or der.  Judges and courts may impose compulsory
and progressive pecuniary penalties to ensure compliance with court orders.  The party injured by the
failure to comply receives the benefit.  Penalties are graduated according to the economic andpersonal situation of the person liable and may be adjusted or cancelled if the latter stops resisting and
offers a complete or partial justification for his behaviour.
7. Court orders consist mainly of measures intended merely to advance the proceedings and
ensure enforcement.  They are issued within 24 hours of the submission of a petition by a party.
Interlocutory orders must be reasoned and settle procedural issues which need to be
addressed.  They are issued within five or eight days of the arrival of the file in the judge's office.
8. The judgment is a decision which brings to an end a dispute in a court of first instance.  It
contains explicit, positive and precise rulings, addresses the matters at issue, in the manner in which
they were brought before the court, and finds for or against the defendant.  Ordinary proceedings take
40 days, summary and executive proceedings 20 days, and expedited summary proceedings 10 days.
The decisions of second and third instance which settle appeals are called " auto de vista " and  "auto de
casación " respectively and are also reasoned.  They are issued within 30 days of receipt of the file.
9. Remedies.  Court decisions can be appealed by the injured party.  Without prejudice to the
remedies available under special laws, court decisions may be challenged by application for
reconsideration, by appeal or by application for judicial review.
10. There is a procedure for extraordinary judicial review.  A judgment enforced in ordinary
proceedings may be the subject of an extraordinary application for judicial review before the Supreme
Court of Justice (highest appeal court), with determination of the cases in which it is warranted.
11. There are also provisions for the extraordinary conclusion of proceedings identified with the
following procedures:
• Abandonment before pleadings.  The plaint iff may withdraw the complaint which
will be considered not to have been lodged (Code of Civil Procedure, Articles 303 to308).
• Abandonment after pleadings.  The plaintiff or his specially authorized representative
may withdraw the complaint.  The defendant  may require his costs to be paid before
he accepts abandonment.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 71
• Abandonment of the right.  In the same circumstances and manner as provided for in
the previous article, the plaintiff may abandon the right on which the action is based.In this case the agreement of the defendant is not required, and the judge must merely
consider whether the action is appropriate in relation to the nature of the right indispute and, if so, close the proceedings.  Subsequently, no other action may be
brought on the same grounds.
• Limitation and settlement are other extraordinary ways of concluding proceedings
(Code of Civil Procedure, Articles 309 to 315).
12. Trial procedures
Ordinary proceedings.  Any dispute not subject to special treatment is heard and decided in
ordinary proceedings (Code of Civil Procedure, Article 36).  In general, given the nature of
intellectual property rights, disputes are decided in this way.
Summary proceedings.  Proceedings in which smaller amounts are involved (Code of Civil
Procedure, Article 317).
Expedited summary proceedings.  Voluntary proceedings without trial and simple, merely
procedural hearings.
13. Preparatory measures.  Enumeration:  Any proceedings may be prepared by anyone who
seeks to make a complaint or anyone who, on good grounds, believes that he will be a defendant.  The
requirements are:
− The person against whom it is proposed to make a complaint shall submit a sworn
statement on any matter relating to his legal personality, without which the case
cannot proceed further.
− Recognition, in the competent court, of the signature of documents and private
papers.  The following cases may arise:
• In the case of a legal person and when the person signing is no longer a
representative of that legal person or is absent, a request may be made for his
alternate to acknowledge the document;
• in the case of obligations contracted by illiterates or the disabled, the terms of
Articles 12.99 and 300 of the Civil Code shall apply;
• if, on being summonsed, the person fails to appear, the signature and
effectiveness of the document shall be recognized unless there is any
impediment on account of force majeure in which case the court shall set a
new date and time or the judge shall proceed to the domicile of the person
summonsed;
• the moveable goods that will be the subject of the court action must be
produced;IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 72
• wills or codicils must be produced if the applicant believes he is the heir or
legatee;
• in the event of dispossession, the titles of ownership or of any other document
relating to the thing sold shall be produced;
• the partner or anyone in possession of company documents shall produce
them, so that the applicant may base his case thereon or defend the casebrought by a third party whether or not the company has been lawfully
dissolved;
• defence counsel shall be appointed for the presumed absent person who is to
be the defendant after justification of the absence within a reasonable time
established by the court, which shall also appoint defence counsel for
abandoned goods;
• a statement must be taken in advance from witnesses who are seriously ill or
soon to leave the country or elderly;
• a court inspection shall be made, with or without expert participation, of the
immovables or movables that will be the subject of the case in order to verifytheir condition.
− If the presumed defendant is about to leave the Republic, he shall establish legal
domicile at the place at which the proceeding is to be initiated, within three days of
being summonsed, with a warning that domicile may be established at the door of the
court at which he is to appear.
− Anyone who is to be a defendant as a result of a claim or any other action necessary
to determine his status in regard to the thin g that will be the subject of the case, shall
specify by what title he holds it.
− Measurements shall be taken by the court (Code of Civil Procedure, Article 319).
A request may be made, as a preparatory measure, for the movable to be produced or to be
stored in its current state, if it is that which the applicant proposes to claim.  A claim shall be filed
within the next 20 days, otherwise the measure shall be without effect (Code of Civil Procedure,
Article 322).
Arrangements can also be made for advance statements by witnesses after the case has been
initiated and before the taking of evidence.
14. Ordinary Proceedings basically involve the following procedural stages:
• Complaint, leave to proceed, summons – reply (possible counterclaim)
• Any preliminary or peremptory objections
• Possibility of third party proceedings
• Taking of evidence, which in exceptional circumstances may be extended
• Conclusion of the taking of evidence, preparations for delivering judgmentIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 73
• Judgment, may be enforced or appealed
• Appeal
• Judicial review
• Execution of the judgment
Executive proceedings under an enforceable document.  A debtor in default is required to pay
or fulfil an enforceable obligation.
The following are enforceable documents:
• Authentic instruments.
• Vesting assents recognized or regarded as such by the competent court.
• Securities and commercial documents enforceable under the Commercial Code.
• Accounts approved and recognized by an executory court order.
• Bills for common expenses in condominiums.
• Unpaid bills for the rental of property.
• Confession of indebtedness before the court competent for executive proceedings.
• An enforceable judgment when execution is requested one year after it became
enforceable.
Ordinary and executive actions.  If an ordinary action is brought and defended, executive
proceedings may not be instituted (Code of Civil Procedure, Articles 487 and 489).
15. Alternative dispute settlement measures may be applied by arbitration and conciliation
pursuant to Law No. 1770 on Arbitration and Conciliation of 10 March 1997.
31. Please explain how civil remedies are being applied in Bolivia at levels "adequate to
compensate for the injury the right holder has suffered," as required by Article 45.1 of the
TRIPS Agreement.
For the purpose of awarding damages and costs the Court authorities may compensate for
injuries sustained by the right holder, provided he or his representative or agent states in the civil
complaints and demonstrates the injuries sustained as a result of the infringement of an intellectual
property right.  The damages will be assessed and payment ordered in the judgment.  An executory
judgment in ordinary proceedings is an enforceable instrument creating rights and obligations and
requiring payment.
When rights are infringed and offences are committed, the court will convict if the evidence is
sufficient to convince it of the accused's criminal liability.  The sentence will specify the appropriate
penalties and the manner and place of performance, and, where appropriate, a judicial pardon,
suspension of the sentence or any obligations to be met by the person convicted.  The sentence shall
also determine costs and order the delivery of seized goods to the person that the court deems best
entitled to them.  It will rule on forfeiture, confiscation and destruction as provided for by law.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 74
The sentence or a judgment imposing an enforceable protective measure will authorize the
special procedure for claiming damages (New Code of Criminal Procedure, Article 365).
Criminal procedures provide for compensation.  Once the sentence or a protective measure on
account of immunity or semi-immunity from prosecution has been enforced, the applicant or
prosecutor may ask the court to order compensation for injury.
A victim who was not joined in the criminal pr oceeding may opt for this remedy, within three
months of being informed of the final judgment (New Code of Criminal Procedure, Article 382).
The procedure requires a claim, its admissibility, the holding of a hearing and a court
decision.  The decision may be appealed with devolutive effect, without further right of appeal (New
Code of Criminal Procedure, Articles 383 to 388).
32. Please describe in detail the provisional procedures and remedies available to right
holders under the laws of Bolivia, citing to the relevant provisions of law and regulation, andindicate any condition under which a right holder may avail itself of those procedures and
remedies.
Copyright and related rights
Under Article 3 of Bolivia's Law No. 1322 on Copyright, the rights of all Bolivian authors
and those of foreigners resident in the country and the works of foreigners published for the first time
in Bolivia are protected.
Non-resident foreigners enjoy the protection of this law to the extent that they are entitled to
do so under international conventions and treaties to which Bolivia is party.  Failing that, they will begranted equal treatment with Bolivians where the latter, in their turn, are given the same treatment as
nationals in the country concerned.
Authors who are stateless or refugees or w hose nationality is disputed are regarded as
nationals of the country in which they have established their residence.
The offence is classified in Article 68 of Law No. 1322, which stipulates what is regarded as a
violation of copyright, and falls within the jurisdiction of the regular criminal courts.  The criminal
penalty, established in Article 362 of the Penal Code, consists of three months to two years'
imprisonment and a seventy days' fine.
Article 68 of Law No. 1322 specifies that a violation of copyright is committed by anyone
who:
(a) In connection with an unpublished literary or artistic work or production and without
the authorization of the author, artist or producer or his successors registers it or
publishes it by any means of reproduction, multiplication or dissemination, as if itwere his own or of a person other than the true author, or with the title changed or
deleted or with the text wilfully altered.
(b) In connection with a published and protected work or production commits any of the
acts set out in the previous paragraph or, without the permission of the copyrightholder, reproduces, adapts, changes, modifies, recasts or abridges or publishes any of
the work by any method of reproduction, multiplication or communication to the
public.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 75
(c) Reproduces a published work, wilfully altering in the fraudulent edition the name of
the authorized publisher.
(d) Reproduces a greater number of copies than those authorized by the copyright owner
or his successors in the respective contract.
(e) Reproduces a phonogram or videogram for marketing or renting it without the written
authorization of the producer or his representative, as well as anyone who imports,
stores, distributes or sells illegal copies of a phonogram or videogram.  An illegal
copy of a phonogram or videogram is taken to mean one which imitates or not theexternal characteristics of the legitimate copy and incorporates the phonogram or
videogram or substantial part of it without the authorization of the owner.
(f) Publishes, sells, reproduces or disseminates the published work or a phonogram
falsely mentioning the name of the author, the authorized publisher, the performers orthe producer.
(g) Reproduces, disseminates, carries out, represents or distributes one or more works
after expiry of the period of authorization granted for that purpose.
(h) Makes false statements intended, directly or indirectly, to harm the author's economic
rights, altering the data relating to the economic proceeds of a show, the number of
copies of a work produced, sold or distributed or by any other means.
(i) Without the authorization of the copyright owner is responsible for the performance
of theatre, musical or cinematographic works.
(j) Without being the author, publisher, successor or representative of one or more of
them, falsely attributes any such status to himself and secures suspension of the
public performance of a work by the authorities.
(k) Improperly appropriates the right to use the names of newspapers, magazines,
sections and columns therein, radio and television programmes, cinema newsreels,
other mass media, fictitious or symbolic characters in literary works, graphic
representations and other periodical publications or typical characters used in artistic
performances or the names of groups, choirs, orchestras, bands or other casts of
artists.
(l) Transmits, retransmits or disseminates by any means cinematographic works, without
the authorization of the producer.
Article 69:  The owner, partner, manager, director or person responsible for the activities of
establishments which give theatrical or musical performances shall be jointly liable with the organizer
of the performance for violations of copyright in such premises, without prejudice to any criminal
responsibility.
Article 52 of Law No. 1322, on Copyright, stipulates in Title X, governing related rights,
protection for the rights of performers, phonogram producers and broadcasting organizations.
Law No. 1302 on the Cinema, of 20 December 1991, establishes the scope of protection for
natural or legal persons engaged in one or more motion picture activities or connected with films, andIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 76
cinematographic intellectual property and co-production, exhibition and distribution contracts must be
registered with the National Cinema Council (CONACINE).
Videotapes to be marketed in Bolivian territory must bear a branded seal issued by
CONACINE.
Trademarks, trade names
The national legislation establishes protection for trademarks in the Law Regulating
Trademarks of 15 January 1918, Article 47 of which sp ecifies a fine and three months to one year's
imprisonment for those who falsify a trademark, use falsified trademarks, fraudulently imitate atrademark, affix another's trademark to their product or goods, or knowingly deal in those products or
goods.
Likewise, Article 48 also specifies a fine and one to three months' imprisonment for those
who sell, directly, indirectly or through intermediaries, falsified or fraudulently imitated trademarksand those who sell genuine trademarks without the c onsent of the owner, as well as those who supply
for sale or place in circulation spurious articles with falsified or fraudulently imitated trademarks,
passing them off as genuine.  There are also penalties for those who introduce into a product's
trademark a false statement or description concerning its nature, quality, quantity, weight or
measurements, or the place or country of manufacture  or shipment, or concerning medals, diplomas,
mentions, awards or honours granted in connecti on with exhibitions or competitions, regardless of
whether the right has expired.
The Commercial Code regulates the right to trade names (Articles 470 et seq.) their
formation, use and transmittal.  Similarly, the Penal Code (Article 236) penalizes a violation of  such
rights by anyone who imitates or counterfeits the trade name of someone else and shall be responsible
for the damage and injury caused, without prejudice to the corresponding penal sanction.
Article 457 et seq. of the Commercial Code also establishes the right to use registered marks,
distinctive signs, marks for concurrent use, transmittal, cancellation of the registration of a mark,
(when it has not been used without interruption for more than five years), except as agreed in
international treaties and on the basis of reciprocity.  The procedure is subject to the provisionscurrently applicable in Bolivia, more specif ically Decision 486 of the Andean Community.
In Article 236 the Penal Code establishes that it is an offence to deceive in connection with
industrial products when anyone places on sale industrial products with names and signs that are
misleading as to their origin, quantity and quality, and the penalty is imprisonment for six months tothree years.
Also, Article 363 establishes that it is an offence to violate the privilege of invention and
specifies a penalty of three months to two years' imprisonment and 30 to 60 days' fine for anyone who
violates the right to privilege of invention or discovery, in the following instances:
(1) By manufacturing without the authorization of the licensee objects or products that
are covered by the privilege;
(2) by using means or procedures that are covered by a privilege.With reference to computer offences, the Penal Code establishes in Article 363 bis that anyone
who wilfully obtains improper benefit for himself or a third party by manipulating a computer data
procedure or transfer producing an improper result or preventing such result from being correct,IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 77
thereby causing a transfer of assets to the detriment of  a third party, shall be liable to one to five years'
imprisonment and a 60 to 200 days' fine.
Article 363 ter relates to the alteration, access and misuse of computer data and stipulates that
anyone who takes possession of, accedes to, uses, modifies, deletes or renders useless data stored in a
computer or on any carrier base, thereby causing inju ry to the owner of the information, shall be liable
to compulsory work for up to one year or a fine of up to 200 days.
The possible judicial proceedings in the case of a copyright violation are held in the ordinary
criminal courts in Bolivia.
Action may also be taken in the civil courts, depending on the particular case.
The arbitration and conciliation procedure may also apply where a right is involved, for
Bolivia has various centres related to the National Chamber of Commerce that attend to the requests
of parties interested in using alternative dispute settlement methods.
SENAPI, the National Intellectual Property Service, has special regulations on conciliation
cases for copyright violations.  Where appropriate, conciliation is used with parties that agree to these
remedies.  Law No. 1770, on Arbitration and Conciliation, applies.
The situation with respect to criminal procedures is explained in the replies to questions 37-39
submitted by the Government of the United States.
Article 57 of the Law Regulating Trademarks of 1918 also establishes that any manufacturer
or trader who becomes aware of the existence in customs, the mail or private business of falsified orfraudulently imitated versions of his trademarks or falsified or fraudulently imitated products,
prejudicial to his rights or interests, may request the seizure of those objects and the court shall so
order, on the responsibility of the petitioner and subject to the necessary security to provide for the
possibility of the seizure requested not being founded in law. It also authorizes the court to order an
inventory and description of the goods or products bearing the said trademarks.
Book 1, Chapter V, of our Commercial Code deals with unfair competition, the acts which
constitute it and the action to be taken by injured parties in order to come before the competent court
so as to obtain, in summary proceedings, an injunction ordering the cessation of the acts of unfair
competition and the imposition of a fine in the event of failure to comply with that injunction.
Chapter II of the Penal Code establishes offences against trade and industry such as unfair
competition, monopolization of the importation, production or distribution of goods, poaching of
customers and bribery of employees. The penalties are, in the first case, imprisonment for six months
to three years and a fine of 100 to 500 days and, in the last two cases, a fine of 30 to 100 days.
33. Please explain how criminal remedies are "expeditious" and "avoid unwarranted
delays" so as to prevent infringements, as required by Articles 41.1 and 61 of the
TRIPS Agreement.
The penalties are clearly laid down in the Penal Code, as well as in the special provisions
previously mentioned.
The procedure for the enforcement of sentences does not present any particular problem,
since the time-limits and procedural remedies necessary to ensure due process are clearly established.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 78
Bolivian legislation provides for clearly defined privileges for persons sentenced to
imprisonment, in particular those specified in the Penal Code such as conditional and "extramuro" or
early release.
It is possible to qualify for conditional release after serving two thirds of the sentence
imposed and meeting the requirements of Article 66 of the Penal Code and the Law on the
Enforcement of Sentences and the Prison System.
In this respect, Article 66 of the Penal Code states:
Conditional release. The court, in a reasoned judgment, may grant conditional release once
only to a prisoner who has served two thirds of his sentence, subject to a report by the General
Directorate of Prisons and the Prison Judge and in accordance with the following
requirements:
He must have completed the various stages of the progressive system and be
classified in the third degree of early release as provided for in Articles 8(c) and 22(c)
of the Law on the Enforcement of Sentences and the Prison System;
he must have demonstrated an aptitude for work and be accustomed to working;
he must have satisfied his civil liability or furnished security in rem  or personal
security;
he must behave well while on release and submit to the supervision of the Prison
Judge and the post-release services of the Directorate General, until the sentence hasbeen completely served.
Article 67. Conditions. The reasoned judgment granting release shall impose the following
conditions on the prisoner:
He must observe the rules of behaviour laid down in Article 61;
he must submit to the supervision of the authorities;
he must give a guarantee of good conduct;he must present himself periodically before the Prison Judge.
Article 68. Revocation.  Conditional release shall be revoked if the person released commits
any deliberate offence or fails to comply with the conditions laid down in the judgment which
remain in force until expiration of the term of imprisonment.
With reference to conditional suspension of sentence, the New Code of Criminal Procedure
states:
Article 366. Conditional suspension of sentence.  The judge or court, subject to the necessary
reports, taking into account the motives or reasons for the offence and the nature and detailsof the act, may conditionally suspend enforc ement of the sentence when the following
requirements are met:
The person convicted has been sentenced to imprisonment for not more than three years;  andIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 79
he has no previous convictions for a deliberate offence in the last five years.
Article 24. Conditions and Rules.  In deciding to suspend the proceedings conditionally, the
judge shall fix a probationary period which may not be less than one year or more than three
years and may in no case exceed the maximum of the sentence pronounced; he shall
determine the conditions and rules to be observed during this period selected, in accordance
with the nature of the offence, from among the following:
Not to change address without the authorization of the judge;
not to frequent certain places or associate with certain people;
not to take drugs or drink alcohol;to submit to the supervision decided upon by the judge;to work on behalf of the community or welfare institutions, outside normal working
hours;
to hold a job or take up, within the period specified by the judge, an occupation, trade,
craft or profession;
to undergo medical or psychological treatment;not to possess or carry weapons;  andnot to drive.
The judge may also impose other similar rules of behaviour which he deems to be appropriate
for the social reintegration of the person on probation.  The judge shall personally notify the accused
of the conditional suspension of the proceedings, while expressly warning him of the rules of
behaviour and the consequences of not complying therewith.
Only the accused may appeal the conditional suspension of the proceedings and that only if
the rules are unlawful, impair his dignity or are excessive.
The judge for the enforcement of sentences shall see that the rules are observed.Article 25. Revocation.  If the accused is shown to have departed substantially from the rules
imposed, does not fulfil agreements or promises made with respect to civil damages
 or is
charged with committing a further offence, the court shall revoke the suspension and theproceedings shall take their course.  In the first case, the judge may opt to extend the period ofprobation and/or modify the measures imposed.
The revocation of the suspension of proceedings shall not prevent subsequent judicial pardon
or conditional suspension of sentence.
If the conditional suspension of proceedings has not been revoked by the time the period of
probation expires, the court shall declare the criminal proceedings terminated.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 80
The privilege of "extramuro" or early release, to which an extensive list of requirements is
attached, also involves not only a formal undertaking to desist from the unlawful activity but also the
recovery of damages, for which the security in rem , personal security and guarantees required by the
New Code of Criminal Procedure must be furnished.
The New Code of Criminal Procedure is introducing new roles and concepts into the
administration of criminal justice in Bolivia.  In this connection, it is important to note that it adopts
the oral, public, continuous and adversarial accusatorial system and establishes mechanisms for the
selection of really serious cases of concern to society and the State.
On the one hand, a new accusatorial role is being given to the Public Prosecutor while, on the
other, more attention is being paid to the victim (right holder).  Noteworthy is the direct relationship
between the two for the purpose of carrying forward the preparatory stage of the proceedings, which
makes it possible to gather together all the elements that enable the prosecutor or plaintiff to found a
charge and the accused to mount a defence, through to the trial stage, the sentence and its
enforcement.
It is important to point out that compensation or indemnification for damage and injury
caused by the offence can be claimed only by the injured party (victim, right holder) against the
perpetrator of the offence and his accessories and, where appropriate, against the person civilly liable,
for which it is necessary to bring a civil action and proceed in accordance with the special rules of theNew Code of Criminal Procedure or apply to the civil courts, it not being permitted to file suit in both
courts at the same time (Articles 36 and 37 NCCP).
J. E
NFORCEMENT – SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS RELATED TO BORDER MEASURES
34. Please describe in detail the procedures under the laws of Bolivia that provide for
border enforcement at least for trademark counte rfeiting and copyright piracy, identifying the
competent authority and citing to the re levant provisions of law or regulation.
Article 31(a), (b), (c) and (f) of the General Customs Law No. 1990 of 28 July 1999 reads as
follows:
"ARTICLE 31.  The functions of National Customs are:To watch over and control the passage of goods across the country’s frontiers and through its
airports.
To intervene in international traffic for the purpose of collecting customs duties and other
taxes as determined by law.
To prevent and repress customs offences within its jurisdiction.Such other functions as may be stipulated by law."Thus, National Customs has the task of checking and controlling any goods that may enter
our territory.
At the same time, it is necessary to take into account Article 86 of the General Customs Law
and Article 120 of Supreme Decree No. 25870 of 11 August 2000, Regulations of the General
Customs Law, which state, respectively:IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 81
"ARTICLE 86 (GCL). The importation of goods protected by the Agreement on Trade-
Related Intellectual Property Rights, established by the World Trade Organization (WTO),
shall comply with the general provisions and basic principles set out in that Agreement.
At the request of the national authority competent for intellectual property, the customs
administration may suspend the clearance of goods that allegedly infringe intellectual
property rights whether obtained in the country or deriving from international agreements
signed by Bolivia and ratified by Parliament."
"ARTICLE 120 (Regulations).  (Customs protec tion of copyright and intellectual property)
In accordance with the provisions of Article 86 of the General Customs Law, Law No. 1322
on Copyright and other laws on intellectual property, at the request of the competent
authority, the customs administration may suspend the customs clearance of goods that
allegedly infringe intellectual property rights, provided that the release of the goods has not
been authorized.
If the competent authority requests the customs administration to suspend customs clearance,
it must submit within ten (10) days reliable evidence showing that industrial property rights,
copyright or intellectual property rights, trademarks, industrial designs or patents protected by
the World Trade Organization are being adversely affected. If upon the expiration of thatperiod no evidence of intellectual property infringement has been submitted, the customs
administration shall proceed with customs clearance.
If intellectual property infringements are proven, the customs administration shall proceed to
seize the goods and, in coordination with the competent authority, order their disposal ordestruction."
In order to enter the national customs territory, goods from abroad and Free Zone goods from
the outside must comply with the customs formalities and an international cargo manifest must be
produced and a customs office of destination within the corresponding regional administration must
be designated before a customs procedure can be applied.
Once customs clearance has begun, if there has been no formal complaint from SENAPI
(National Intellectual Property Service) concerning an alleged infringement of copyright, the customs
administration will proceed with the release of the goods into free circulation.
At the same time, there must be compliance with the supranational intellectual property
provisions whose application is mandatory in our territory.
Thus, Andean Community Decision 486 contains an entire chapter on the border measures for
which Part III, Section 4, of the TRIPS Agreement provides.
Article 250 authorizes the owner of a registered trademark who has valid grounds for
suspecting that the importation or exportation of counterfeit trademark goods will take place to
request the competent national authority to suspend the corresponding customs operation while
supplying the necessary information and a sufficiently detailed and precise description of the goods
subject to the alleged infringement so that they can be identified.
Article 251 of Decision 486 allows the trademark owner to participate in the inspection of the
detained goods in order to substantiate his claims, conferring the same right on the importer or
exporter of the goods. At the same time, this provision requires the competent national authority toIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 82
make all necessary arrangements for confidential information to be protected during the inspection
procedure.
In accordance with the TRIPS Agreement, Article 253 specifies that:"If, within ten working days af ter the applicant has been served notice of the suspension of the
customs operation, the plaintiff fails to initiate infringement proceedings or the competent
national authority has not taken measures to prolong the suspension, the measure shall be
revoked and the detained goods shall be released."
Moreover, Article 254 authorizes the party against whom the measure is directed to appeal
against it, once the infringement proceedings have been initiated.
Article 255 states that once the existence of an infringement has been determined, such
counterfeit trademark goods as the competent national authority may have seized may not be re-
exported or subjected to a different customs procedure, except in cases duly qualified by thecompetent national authority or expressly authorized  by the right holder, without prejudice to other
rights of action available and subject to the right of the defendant to seek review of the decision by a
judicial authority.
Finally, Article 256 of Decision 486, in conform ity with Article 60 of the TRIPS Agreement,
deals with de minimis  exports, specifying that small quantities of goods of a non-commercial nature
contained in travellers’ luggage or sent in small consignments are excluded from the application of the
provisions on border measures.
35. Please indicate if border enforcement is available to owners of other forms of intellectual
property and, if so, please describe the procedures and remedies available in relation to each
form of intellectual property, citing the relevant provisions of law.
Foreign goods enter Bolivian territory under the corresponding international cargo manifest
and there are no coercive measures, procedures or remedies until SENAPI requests the border
customs administration to suspend customs clearance for copyright or intellectual property
infringements.
In this case, Article 120 of Supreme Decree No. 25870, Regulations of the General Customs
Law, applies. This stipulates that the competent national authority (SENAPI) may request the
suspension of clearance if copyright or intellectual property rights, trademarks, industrial designs or
patents protected by the WTO are being adversely affected.
36. Article 58 of the TRIPS Agreement specifies procedures to be followed where the
competent authorities can act ex officio.  Plea se explain whether the competent authorities in
Bolivia are empowered to act ex officio and, if s o, please identify the intellectual property areas
subject to ex officio action.
Supreme Decree No. 25159 of September 1998 authorizes SENAPI, as the competent
authority, to perform protection functions in the field of industrial and intellectual property and
copyright.
At the same time, Article 86 of the General Customs Law states that: "The importation of
goods protected by the Agreement on Trade-Related Intellectual Property Rights, established by the
World Trade Organization (WTO), shall comply with the general provisions and basic principles set
out in that Agreement.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 83
At the request of the national authority competent for intellectual property, the customs
administration may suspend the clearance of the goods that allegedly infringe intellectual property
rights whether obtained in the country or deriving  from international agreements signed by Bolivia
and ratified by Parliament."
Article 120 of the Regulations of the General Customs Law (Customs protection of copyright
and intellectual property) reads as follows:
"In accordance with the provisions of Article 86 of the General Customs Law, Law No. 1322
on Copyright and other laws on intellectual property, at the request of the competentauthority, the customs administration may suspend the customs clearance of the goods that
allegedly infringe intellectual property rights, provided that the release of the goods has not
been authorized.
If the competent authority requests the customs administration to suspend customs clearance,
it must submit within ten (10) days convincing evidence showing that industrial property
rights, copyright or intellectual property rights, trademarks, industrial designs or patents
protected by the World Trade Organization are being adversely affected. If upon the
expiration of that period no evidence of intellectual property infringement has been submitted,
the customs administration shall proceed with customs clearance.
If intellectual property infringements are proven, the customs administration shall proceed to
seize the goods and, in coordination with the competent authority, order their disposal or
destruction."
At the same time, Articles 250 to 256 of Title XV, Chapter III, of Decision 486 establish the
border measures adopted by Members to protect intellectual property rights:
"Article 250. The owner of a registered trad emark who has valid grounds for suspecting that
the importation or exportation of counterfeit trademark goods will take place may request the
competent national authority to suspend the corresponding customs operation. The conditions
and hand stipulated in the domestic legislation of the Member country concerned shall beapplicable to this request and to such an order as that authority may issue.
The party requesting measures to be taken at the border shall be required to supply the
necessary information and a sufficiently detailed and precise description of the goods subject
to the alleged infringement so that they can be identified.
The competent national authority may, if permitted by the domestic laws of the Member
country, order the application of measures at the border ex officio.
Article 251.  The competent national authority shall give trademark owners the opportunity to
participate in the inspection of the detained g oods in order to substantiate their claims. The
importer or exporter of those goods shall be entitled to exercise the same right.
The competent national authority shall make all necessary arrangements for confidential
information to be protected during the inspection procedure.
Article 252. Upon fulfilment of the applicable conditions and hand, the competent national
authority shall order or deny suspension of the customs operation and shall inform the
applicant accordingly.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 84
In the event that the authority orders the operation to be suspended, the notification of the
applicant shall include the name and address of the consignor, importer, exporter, and
consignee of the goods concerned, and the amount of goods to be detained. The importer orexporter of those goods shall likewise be notified of the suspension.
Article 253. If, within ten working days after the applicant has been served notice of the
suspension of the customs operation, the plaintiff fails to initiate infringement proceedings or
the competent national authority has not taken measures to prolong the suspension, the
measure shall be revoked and the detained goods shall be released.
Article 254. If infringement proceedings have been initiated, the defendant may appeal to the
competent national authority, which shall decide whether to modify, revoke, or confirm the
suspension.
Article 255. Once the existence of an infringement has been determined, such counterfeit
trademark goods as the competent national authority may have seized may not be re-exported
in an unaltered state or subjected to a different customs procedure, except in cases duly
qualified by the competent national authority or expressly authorized by the right holder.
Without prejudice to other rights of action available to the right holder and subject to the right
of the defendant to seek review of the decision by a judicial authority, the competent national
authorities shall have the authority to order the destruction or seizure of infringing goods.
Article 256. Small quantities of goods of a non-commercial nature contained in travellers'
luggage or sent in small consignments sha ll be excluded from the application of the
provisions of this chapter."
K. 
ENFORCEMENT – CRIMINAL PROCEDURES
37. Please describe in detail how the laws of Bolivia implement Article 61 of the
TRIPS Agreement that requires Members to have criminal procedures and penalties, including
imprisonment and/or monetary fines sufficient to act as a deterrent, at least for cases of wilful
trademark counterfeiting and copyright infringement  on a commercial scale.  Please cite to the
relevant provisions of law and regulation.
Article 235 of the Penal Code on commercial fraud states that: "Anyone who in a public
place, or a place open to the public, deceives the buyer by supplying him with one thing instead of
another shall, provided there has been no more se rious offence, be liable to imprisonment for six
months to three years."
According to Article 236 of the Penal Code establishing offences against industry and trade,
"Anyone who places on sale industrial products with names and signs that are misleading as to the
origin, quantity or quality of those products shall be liable to imprisonment for six months to threeyears."
With reference to copyright and computer offences, Articles 362, 363, 363 bis and 363 ter of
the Penal Code establish criminal penalties of three months to two years’ imprisonment and a fine of
60 days and one to five years’ imprisonment and a fine of 60 to 200 days, respectively.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 85
38. Article 61 also requires that remedies in a ppropriate cases include the seizure, forfeiture
and destruction of infringing goods and any materials and implements the predominant use of
which has been the commission of the offence.  Please describe the provisions in the laws of
Bolivia that provide for such remedies, and describe the circumstances in which those remedieswould be imposed, citing to the relevant provisions of law or regulation.
According to Article 238 of Decision 486, owners  of a right protected by the Decision may
bring proceedings with the competent national authority against anyone who infringes their rights or
engages in acts extremely likely to result in such infringement.  In these proceedings they may seek,
among other things, compensation for injury.  There is a similar provision in the Law on Copyright.
39. Article 61 also indicates that Members may provide for criminal procedures and
penalties in cases of wilful infringement of oth er forms of intellectual property.  Please describe
any provisions of the laws of Bolivia that provide for such procedures and remedies, citing to
the relevant provisions of law or regulation.
Article 235 of the Penal Code on commercial fraud states that: "Anyone who in a public
place, or a place open to the public, deceives the buyer by supplying him with one thing instead of
another shall, provided there has been no more se rious offence, be liable to imprisonment for six
months to three years."
According to Article 236 of the Penal Code establishing offences against industry and trade,
"Anyone who places on sale industrial products with names and signs that are misleading as to the
origin, quantity or quality of those products shall be liable to imprisonment for six months to three
years."
With reference to copyright and computer offences, Articles 362, 363, 363 bis and 363 ter of
the Penal Code establish criminal penalties of the three months to two years’ imprisonment and a fine
of 60 days and one to five years’ imprisonment and a fine of 60 to 200 days, respectively.
L. 
STATISTICAL QUESTIONS
40. Please provide statistical information related  to civil copyright, trademark, geographical
indication, industrial design, patent, integr ated circuit layout-design, and trade secret
enforcement for 2000, including the number of cases filed; injunctions issued; infringing
products seized; infringing equipment seized; cases resolved (including settlement); and the
amount of damages awarded.
The Government of Bolivia has no information in this regard.
41. Please provide statistical information relat ed to criminal enforcement in the area of
copyright piracy and trademark infringeme nt for 2000, including the number of raids,
prosecutions, convictions, and the amount of fines and/or jail terms (including whether the fines
were paid and whether the jail term was actually served or was suspended) and any otherinformation establishing that the criminal syst em operates effectively to deter copyright piracy
and trademark counterfeiting.
The Government of Bolivia has no information in this regard.
_______________IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 86
ANEXO
ANTEPROYECTO DE CÓDIGO DE PROPIEDAD INTELECTUAL,
DERECHO DE AUTOR Y DERECHOS CONEXOS
LIBRO PRIMERO
DERECHO DE AUTOR Y DERECHOS CONEXOS
TÍTULO I
DERECHO DE AUTOR
CAPÍTULO I
GENERALIDADES
Artículo 6.  Generalidades.
I. El derecho de autor tiene las siguientes generalidades:
1. Se reconoce y garantiza el derecho de autor en favor de los autores y titulares de
derechos sobre sus obras y el derecho conexo en favor de los artistas, intérpretes y
ejecutantes, productores de fonogramas y organismos de radiodifusión sobre susproducciones.
2. El autor de una obra tiene, por el solo hecho de la creación, la titularidad originaria del
derecho sobre la obra, que comprende a su vez, derechos morales que amparan la
paternidad e integridad de la obra y los derechos patrimoniales que protegen el
aprovechamiento económico de la misma.
3. Los derechos señalados  son independientes de la propiedad del soporte material que
contiene la obra, de manera que la enajenación del indicado soporte no implica ninguna
cesión de derechos en favor del adquirente, salvo disposición expresa del presente
Libro.
4. El derecho de autor tiene también por objeto salvaguardar el acervo cultural de la
nación.
Artículo 7.  Nacimiento del derecho.
I. El derecho de autor nace con la creación de la obra sin que sea necesario el registro, depósito
u otra formalidad para obtener la protección reconocida por el presente Libro.
II. Las formalidades que se establecen tienen por objeto otorgar mayor seguridad jurídica a los
autores y titulares de los derechos que se protegen.
III. Las disposiciones del presente Libro se aplicarán a las obras literarias o artísticas que hayan
sido creadas antes de la fecha de entrada en vigor del presente Código, a condición de que las
obras no sean todavía de dominio público, debido a la expiración de la duración a la que
estaba sometida en la legislación anterior o en la legislación de su país de origen.
IV. El párrafo anterior se aplicará para la protección de los derechos conexos reconocidos por el
presente Libro.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 87
V. Los efectos legales de los actos, contratos y registros concertados o estipulados antes de la
entrada en vigor del presente Libro permanecerán intactos.
Artículo 8.  Domicilio de los autores.
I. El presente Libro ampara los derechos de los autores bolivianos, extranjeros domiciliados en
el país y a las obras de extranjeros publicadas por primera vez en el país.
II. Los extranjeros no domiciliados en el país gozarán de la protección del presente Libro, en la
medida que les corresponda en virtud de los convenios y tratados internacionales en los que
Bolivia sea parte.  En su defecto, estarán equiparados a los bolivianos cuando éstos, a su vez,
lo estén a los nacionales en el país respectivo.
III. Para los efectos del presente Libro, los autores apátridas, refugiados o de nacionalidad
controvertida serán considerados como nacionales del país donde tengan establecido sudomicilio.
Artículo 9.  Independencia y compatibilidad.
El derecho de autor es independiente, compatible y acumulable con:
1. La propiedad y otros derechos que tengan por objeto la cosa material a la que esté
incorporada la obra.
2. Los derechos de propiedad industrial que puedan existir sobre la obra.
3. Los otros derechos de propiedad intelectual reconocidos por el presente Libro.
CAPÍTULO II
OBJETO DEL DERECHO DE AUTOR
Artículo 10.  Objeto del derecho de autor.
I. Las disposiciones del presente Libro, regulan el ámbito de protección del derecho de autor,
sobre las obras del ingenio humano de carácter original, sean de índole literaria, artística,
científica y los derechos conexos, cualquiera sea su género, forma de expresión, mérito o
finalidad.
II. El objeto de la protección del derecho de autor es toda creación literaria, artística, científica
cualquiera sea la forma de expresión tangible o intangible y el medio o soporte, actualmente
conocido o que se conozca en el futuro.
Artículo 11.  Obras protegidas.
Las obras protegidas comprenden, entre otras, las siguientes:
1. Libros, folletos, artículos, impresos, epístolas, novelas, cuentos, poemas, crónicas,
criticas, ensayos, misivas, guiones para teatro, cinematografía, televisión, y obras
expresadas por escrito.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 88
2. Conferencias, discursos, lecciones, sermones, alegatos en derecho, memorias,
comentarios y obras compuestas por palabras y expresadas oralmente.
3. Obras dramáticas o dramático-musicales, obras teatrales, obras coreográficas y
pantomímicas, cuya representación se fije por escrito o de otra manera.
4. Composiciones musicales, con o sin letra.
5. Obras audiovisuales como las cinematográficas y videogramas, cualquiera sea el
soporte o procedimiento empleado.
6. Obras de bellas artes, incluidos pintura, dibujo, escultura, grabado, litografía y las
historietas gráficas, cómicos, así como sus ensayos o bocetos y las demás obras
plásticas.
7. Proyectos, planos, maquetas y diseños de obras arquitectónicas y de ingeniería.8. Ilustraciones, mapas, gráficos, planos, croquis, diseños y obras plásticas y
tridimensionales relativas a la geografía, la topografía, y en general a la ciencia.
9. Obras fotográficas o las que se asimilan a las expresadas por procedimiento análogo a
la fotografía.
10. Obras de artes aplicadas, aunque su valor artístico no pueda ser disociado del carácter
industrial de los objetos a los cuales estén incorporados, incluyendo las obras de
artesanía.
11. Bocetos escenográficos y las respectivas escenografías.
12. Programas de ordenador o computación.
13. Obras derivadas como las adaptaciones, traducciones, arreglos musicales, revisiones,
actualizaciones y anotaciones, compendios resúmenes y extractos;  y, otras
transformaciones de una obra literaria, artística o científica, realizadas con expresa
autorización del autor de la obra original, y sin perjuicio de sus derechos.
14. Las traducciones, adaptaciones, transformaciones, arreglo de obras de cultura
tradicional y popular, expresiones del folklore y obras inspiradas en el mismo.
15. Colecciones de obras, tales como antologías o compilaciones y bases de datos de toda
clase, que por la selección o disposición de las materias constituyan creaciones
intelectuales, sin perjuicio de los derechos de autor que subsistan sobre los materiales o
datos.
Artículo 12.  Excepción.
I. La protección reconocida en el presente Libro no alcanzará a los textos oficiales de carácter
legislativo, administrativo o jurídico ni a las traducciones oficiales de los mismos, ni lasnoticias del día, ni las ideas, procedimientos, sistemas, métodos de funcionamiento,
conceptos, principios, descubrimientos o simples datos o hechos, aun cuando éstos expresen,
describan, expliquen, ilustren o se incorporen en una obra.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 89
II. No son objeto de protección las ideas ni abstractas, ni las ideas contenidas en las obras
literarias y artísticas, o el contenido ideológico o técnico de las obras científicas, ni su
aprovechamiento industrial o comercial.
CAPÍTULO III
TITULARES DEL DERECHO DE AUTOR
Artículo 13.  Titulares de los derechos.
El autor de una obra es el primer titular de los derechos morales y patrimoniales sobre su obra,
únicamente la persona individual puede ser autor;  sin embargo, el Estado, las entidades de derecho
público y las personas colectivas  pueden ser titulares de derecho de autor, de conformidad con las
normas del presente Libro.
Artículo 14.  Presunción de autor.
Se presume autor de una obra, salvo prueba en contrario, a la persona individual que aparezca
indicada como tal en la obra, mediante su nombre, seudónimo, iniciales, sigla o cualquier otro signo
habitual que esté indicado en ella.
Artículo 15.  Las obras realizadas en colaboración.
Los coautores de una obra realizada en colaboración serán los primeros cotitulares de los derechos
morales y patrimoniales sobre dicha obra.  Sin embargo, si una obra realizada en colaboración se
puede dividir en partes independientes, los coautores podrán beneficiarse de derechos independientes
sobre esas partes, a la vez que serán cotitulares de los derechos de la obra realizada en colaboración
considerada como un todo.
Artículo 16.  Modificación de una obra musical.
Cuando una obra se traduzca o adapte a otro idioma, los traductores o adaptadores serán autores de
sus propias traducciones o adaptaciones y no adquirirán el derecho del titular, pues el carácter
indicado lo conservará para todos los efectos legales, el autor de la obra original.
Artículo 17.  Obra colectiva.
I. Los derechos patrimoniales sobre la obra colectiva, salvo estipulación en contrario, se
presumen cedidos a la persona natural o jurídica que la publique bajo su nombre.
II. A falta de mención expresa, se entenderá que los derechos quedan cedidos al responsable
principal de la utilización de la obra.
Artículo 18.  Obra anónima.
I. Cuando la obra se divulgue en forma anónima, o bien bajo seudónimo, iniciales, sigla o signo
que no identifiquen al autor, el editor cuyo nombre aparezca en la obra, será salvo prueba en
contrario considerado como representante del autor y, como tal, con derecho a proteger yhacer respetar los derechos del mismo, mientras éste no revele su identidad.
II. Se exceptúan las obras de cultura tradicional y popular o folklóricas de autor no conocido.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 90
Artículo 19.  Sociedad conyugal.
I. El derecho de autor no forma parte de la sociedad conyugal y podrá ser administrado
libremente por el cónyuge autor o derechohabiente del autor.
II. El cónyuge autor conservará su derecho moral y patrimonial, conforme lo establecido por el
Código de Familia.
Artículo 20 .  Obras creadas bajo dependencia laboral.
Las obras creadas bajo dependencia laboral, en el marco del contrato de trabajo, o las creadas por
empleados o funcionarios públicos en cumplimiento de las obligaciones inherentes a sus cargos, salvo
pacto en contrario del contrato, tendrán como titular de los derechos morales y patrimoniales al autor,
pero los derechos patrimoniales sobre dicha obra se considerarán transmitidos al empleador en la
medida justificada por las actividades habituales del empleador en el momento de creación de la obra.
Artículo 21.  Obras creadas por encargo.
I. En las obras creadas por encargo, el titular de los derechos patrimoniales es el comitente,
cuando se establezca la exclusividad.
II. El autor de la obra conservará el derecho de explotación cuando la exclusividad no sea
expresa.
Artículo 22.  Obras derivadas.
El derecho de autor sobre las traducciones y demás obras derivadas, puede existir, aun cuando las
obras originarias no estén protegidas, pero no entraña ningún derecho exclusivo sobre dichas
creaciones originarias, de manera que el autor de la obra derivada no puede oponerse a que otros
traduzcan, adapten, modifiquen o recopilen sus obras originarias, siempre que sean trabajos originalesdistintos del suyo.
TÍTULO II
CONTENIDO DEL DERECHO DE AUTOR
CAPÍTULO I
DERECHOS MORALES
Artículo 23.  Derechos morales.
I. El derecho moral es ilimitado en el tiempo, el autor de una obra, independientemente de sus
derechos patrimoniales e incluso tras haberlos cedido tendrá derecho perpetuo, inalienable,
imprescriptible, irrenunciable e inembargable para:
1. Reivindicar en todo tiempo la paternidad de su obra y, en especial, para que se indique
su nombre o seudónimo en los ejemplares de su obra, cuando se realice cualesquiera de
los actos relativos a la utilización de la misma.
2. Oponerse a toda deformación, mutilación, alteración o modificación de la obra, que
pueda perjudicar el honor o la reputación del autor.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 91
3. A conservar el anonimato o a utilizar un seudónimo.
4. Conservar su obra inédita o anónima, pudiendo exigir que se mencione su nombre o
seudónimo cada vez que sea utilizada.  Después del fallecimiento del autor, no podrá
divulgarse su obra si éste lo hubiera prohibido por disposición testamentaria, ni podrárevelarse su identidad si aquél, por el mismo medio, no lo hubiera autorizado.
5. Acceder al ejemplar único o raro de la obra que se encuentre en posesión de tercero, a
fin de ejercitar el derecho de divulgación o cualquier otro que le corresponda.
II. Este derecho no permitirá exigir el desplazamiento de la obra y el acceso a la misma, se
llevará a efecto en el lugar y forma que ocasionen menos incomodidades al poseedor, a quien
se indemnizará, en su caso, por los daños y perjuicios que le ocasionen.
III. A la muerte del autor, el ejercicio del derecho moral corresponderá sin limite de tiempo a los
causahabientes.
IV. La violación de cualesquiera de estos derechos dará lugar a la indemnización de daños y
perjuicios independientemente de las otras acciones contempladas en este Libro.
CAPÍTULO II
DERECHOS PATRIMONIALES
Artículo 24.  Derechos patrimoniales.
El autor de una obra protegida o sus causahabientes tendrán el derecho exclusivo a gozar de la
explotación de su obra en cualquier forma y obtener beneficios, salvo limitaciones establecidas en el
presente Libro.
Artículo 25.  Ámbito de aplicación.
I. El derecho exclusivo de explotación comprende entre otros la facultad de realizar, autorizar o
prohibir:
1. La reproducción de su obra total o parcialmente por cualquier forma o procedimiento;
2. La traducción, adaptación, arreglo o cualquier transformación de la obra;
3. La comunicación pública de la obra po r cualquier medio conocido o conocerse, que
sirva para difundir las palabras, signos, los sonidos o las imágenes;
4. La distribución pública de ejemplares o copias de la obra mediante la venta,
arrendamiento o préstamo público, alquiler o cualquier otra transferencia de propiedad
o de posesión;
5. La importación al territorio nacional de ejemplares producidos ilegalmente de la obra.
6. La radiodifusión de su obra, y
7. La representación o ejecución de su obra en público.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 92
Cada una de las modalidades citadas son independientes entre sí.
II. La explotación de la obra por cualquier forma y en especial mediante alguno de los actos
enumerados en este artículo, es ilícita sin la autorización expresa del titular de los derechos de
autor, salvo las excepciones establecidas en el presente Libro.
Artículo 26.  Derecho de importación.
I. El derecho de importación confiere al titular de los derechos de autor la facultad de prohibir la
introducción en el territorio nacional, del original o copias de las obras protegidas, sin
perjuicio de obtener igual prohibición respecto de las copias ilícitas.
II. Este derecho podrá ejercerse tanto para suspender el ingreso del original y copias en fronteras,
como obtener el retiro o suspender la circulación de ejemplares que ya hubieren ingresado.
El derecho de importación no afectará los ejemplares que formen parte del equipaje personal.
Artículo 27.  Derecho de distribución.
I. El derecho de distribución otorga al titular de los derechos de autor, la facultad de poner a
disposición del público el original o copias de la obra mediante la venta, arrendamiento,
préstamo público o cualquier otra forma.
II. El autor de una obra arquitectónica u obra de arte aplicada no puede oponerse a que el
propietario arriende la obra o construcción.
CAPÍTULO III
DURACIÓN DE LOS DERECHOS PATRIMONIALES
Artículo 28.  Término de duración del derecho de autor.
La duración de los derechos patrimoniales concedida por el presente Libro será por toda la vida del
autor y por noventa (90) años después de su muerte, en favor de sus herederos, legatarios y
cesionarios.
Artículo 29.  Período de protección en obras colectivas.
Los derechos patrimoniales sobre las obras colectivas, audiovisuales, durarán noventa (90) años a
partir de su publicación, exhibición, fijación, transmisión y utilización, según corresponda o, si nohubieran sido publicados, desde su creación.
Artículo 30.  Período de protección en obras anónimas y seudónimas.
I. En las obras anónimas que no sean las folklóricas o de cultura tradicional y popular y en las
obras seudónimas, los derechos patrimoniales durarán noventa (90) años desde la divulgación
de la obra.
II. Si durante el período de protección no se conociera la identidad del autor de la obra publicada
bajo seudónimo, se la considerará anónima.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 93
Artículo 31.  Cómputo de los plazos.
I. Los plazos establecidos en este capítulo se computarán desde el día 1º de enero del año
siguiente al de la muerte o al de la publicación, exhibición, fijación transmisión, utilización ocreación, según corresponda.
II. En la obra colectiva, el período de protección correrá a partir de la muerte del último coautor.
Si una obra colectiva se diere a conocer por partes, el período de protección correrá a partir de
la fecha de publicación del último suplemento, parte o volumen.
III. En las obras anónimas y seudónimas, si pasados noventa (90) años desde la divulgación de la
obra, el autor revelara su identidad de modo fehaciente durante su vida o por testamento, se
aplicará el período de protección a partir de la muerte del autor, sin perjuicio de los derechos
adquiridos por terceros.
Artículo 32.  Duración de la protección para las obras de artes aplicadas.
El plazo de protección de los derechos patrimoniales sobre la obra de arte aplicada, expira a los
cincuenta (50) años desde la realización de la obra.
Artículo 33.  Extinción de derecho patrimonial privado.
Vencido el plazo de protección, la extinción del derecho patrimonial determina la entrada de la obra a
la sociedad de gestión colectiva que corresponda y dominio público.
TÍTULO III
DISPOSICIONES ESPECIALES A CIERTAS OBRAS
CAPÍTULO I
MEDIOS DE COMUNICACIÓN SOCIAL
Artículo 34.  Alcance.
I. Los derechos patrimoniales de autor de artículos, guiones, libretos, dibujos, fotografías y
demás producciones sin firma, aportados por el personal de redacción y producción de la
empresa sujeto a contrato de empleo, se consideran cedidos, a las empresas de impresión,radio, televisión y otros medios de comunicación social.
II. En el caso de publicarse con firma, se consideran cedidos sólo los derechos de publicación
por la empresa, reteniendo los autores todos los demás derechos amparados en este Libro.
CAPÍTULO II
CULTURA TRADICIONAL Y POPULAR, FOLKLORE Y ARTESANÍA
Artículo 35.  Alcance.
En las creaciones o adaptaciones, basadas en la tradición, expresadas en un grupo de individuos que
reflejan las expresiones de la comunidad, su identidad, sus valores transmitidos oralmente, por
imitación o por otros medios, ya sea que utilicen lenguaje literario, música, juegos, mitologías,
rituales, costumbres, artesanías, arquitectura u otras artes, serán protegidos  los derechos de las
comunidades de conformidad a normas nacionales y convenios internacionales ratificados por el
Estado.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 94
Artículo 36.  Obra del folklore.
I. Las obras del folklore de acuerdo con la definición establecida en el presente Libro, para los
efectos de su utilización como obras literarias y artísticas, serán consideradas como obras
pertenecientes al patrimonio nacional, sin perjuicio de las normas de protección que puedanser adoptadas por otras instituciones del Estado o por acuerdos internacionales.
II. Es obligatoria la mención del origen de las obras, con una referencia, en lo posible, clara de la
Comunidad de la que proceden.
Artículo 37.  Obra de artesanía y diseño artesanal.
Las artesanías y el diseño artesanal serán protegidos por las normas generales del presente Libro y
especialmente por aquéllas referidas a las artes plásticas y al patrimonio nacional.
CAPÍTULO III
PROGRAMAS DE ORDENADOR
Artículo 38.  Alcance.
I. Los programas de ordenador se consideran obras literarias y se protegen como tales.
II. La protección se otorga independientemente de que hayan sido incorporados en un ordenador
y cualquiera sea la forma en que estén expresados, ya sea en forma legible por el hombre(código fuente) o en forma legible por máquina (código objeto), ya sean programas operativos
y programas aplicativos, incluyendo diagramas de flujo, planos, manuales de uso, y en
general, aquellos elementos que conformen la estructura, secuencia y organización del
programa.
Artículo 39.  Ámbito de aplicación.
I. La adquisición de un ejemplar de un programa de ordenador que haya circulado lícitamente,
autoriza a su propietario a realizar exclusivamente:
1. una copia de la versión del programa legible por máquina (código objeto) con fines de
seguridad o resguardo;
2. fijar el programa en la memoria interna del aparato, ya sea que dicha fijación
desaparezca o no al apagarlo, con el único fin y en la medida necesaria para utilizar el
programa y,
3. salvo prohibición expresa, adaptar el programa para su exclusivo uso personal, siempre
que se limite al uso normal previsto en la licencia.  El adquirente no podrá transferir a
ningún título el soporte que contenga el programa así adaptado, ni podrá utilizarlo de
ninguna otra forma sin autorización expresa, según las reglas generales.
II. Se requerirá la autorización del titular de los derechos para cualquier otra utilización,
inclusive la reproducción para fines de uso personal o el aprovechamiento del programa por
varias personas, a través de redes u otros sistemas análogos, conocidos o por conocerse.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 95
Artículo 40.  Secreto autoral.
Constituyen secreto autoral las especificaciones del soporte lógico, los algoritmos, los programas
fuente, el diseño del producto, los diagramas de flujo, heurísticas y demás medios de creación del
soporte lógico y el autor o titular no está obligado a revelar tales elementos.
Artículo 41.  Licencia de uso.
El titular de los derechos de autor mediante contrato de adhesión otorgará una licencia de uso.
Artículo 42.  Alquiler o préstamo.
I. El programa de ordenador será considerado parte esencial del contrato, cuando la
funcionalidad del objeto, dependa directamente del programa de ordenador, que será
suministrado por el referido objeto.
II. Cuando el programa de ordenador no sea la parte esencial del contrato, no se aplicará el
derecho de arrendamiento.
CAPÍTULO IV
OBRAS ARQUITECTÓNICAS
Artículo 43.  Alcance.
I. El autor de las obras de arquitectura no puede oponerse a las modificaciones que se hagan
necesarias durante la construcción de la obra o con posterioridad, pero el autor de la obra de
arquitectura debe ser consultado sobre las modificaciones que fueren necesarias realizar
durante la construcción o con posterioridad a ella y tendrá preferencia para el estudio y
realización de éstas.
II. En cualquier caso, si las modificaciones se realizaran sin el consentimiento del autor, éste
podrá rechazar la paternidad de la obra modificada y quedará prohibido al propietario para
invocar en lo futuro el nombre del autor del proyecto original, sin perjuicio de la aplicación de
las sanciones establecidas en el presente Libro.
Artículo 44.  Autorización del arquitecto.
La adquisición de un proyecto de arquitectura implica el derecho del adquirente para ejecutar la obra
proyectada, pero se requiere el consentimiento escrito de su autor, en los términos que él señale, para
utilizarlo en otras obras.
CAPÍTULO V
OBRAS DE ARTES PLÁSTICAS Y OTRAS OBRAS
Artículo 45.  Derecho del adquirente.
I. El adquirente de un objeto material que contiene una obra de arte, tiene, salvo pacto en
contrario, el derecho de exponer públicamente la obra, a cualquier título.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 96
II. Este derecho no se aplicará a las personas que hayan adquirido los originales o los ejemplares
de una obra mediante alquiler o cualquier otro medio sin haber adquirido el derecho de
propiedad.
Artículo  46.  Derecho de participación.
I. Si el original de una obra de arte plástico, o el manuscrito original del escritor o compositor
fuere revendido en subasta pública o si en dicha reventa interviniera directa o indirectamente
un comerciante de tales obras en calidad de comprador, vendedor o agente, el vendedor
deberá pagar al autor o a sus herederos, según corresponda, una participación equivalente al
cinco por ciento (5%) del precio de venta, gozando de este derecho que es irrenunciable e
inalienable, salvo pacto en contrario, siempre que se mejore la situación del autor.
II. El comerciante se constituye en depositario del porcentaje establecido a favor, del autor o
titular, el mismo que podrá ejercitar su derecho de cobro en cualquier momento a partir de la
venta.
Artículo  47.  Sujetos responsables del cumplimiento.
Los responsables de establecimientos comerciales, el comerciante o cualquier otra persona que haya
intervenido en la reventa serán solidariamente responsables con el vendedor por el pago de estederecho y deberán notificar la reventa a la sociedad de gestión correspondiente, o en su defecto, al
autor o sus derechohabientes, en el plazo de tres meses, acompañando la documentación para la
práctica de la liquidación.
Artículo 48.  Los retratos y bustos.
I. El retrato o busto de una persona no podrá ser puesto en el comercio sin el consentimiento de
la misma y a su muerte, de sus causahabientes.
II. La publicación del retrato o busto es libre, cuando se relacione, únicamente, con fines
científicos, didácticos, culturales con hechos, acontecimientos de interés público o que se
hubieren desarrollado en público.
Artículo 49.  Obras fotográficas.
I. El autor de una obra fotográfica o el realizador de una mera fotografía sobre una persona,
deberá contar con la autorización de la persona fotografiada, y a su muerte, de sus
causahabientes, para ejercer sus derechos de autor o conexos, según el caso.
II. La autorización deberá constar por escrito y referirse específicamente al tipo de utilización
autorizada de la imagen.
III. La utilización de la imagen será lícita cuando haya sido captada en el curso regular de
acontecimientos públicos y responda a fines culturales o informativos, o se realice enasociación con hechos o acontecimientos de interés público.
Artículo  50.  Transferencia y derechos.
El autor podrá enajenar el original de su obra pictórica, escultórica y de artes figurativas en general.
En este caso, salvo expreso pacto en contrario, se considerará que no ha concedido al adquirente
ningún derecho autoral sobre su obra.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 97
TÍTULO IV
LIMITACIONES AL DERECHO DE AUTOR
CAPÍTULO ÚNICO
LIMITACIONES DE LOS DERECHOS PATRIMONIALES
Artículo 51.  Derecho de cita.
I. Sin perjuicio de lo establecido en los artículos 23 y 24 del presente Libro, es permitido citar a
un autor, entendiéndose por cita la inclusión, en una obra propia, de cortos fragmentos de
obras ajenas, siempre que se trate de obras ya divulgadas, se indique la fuente y el nombre delautor de la obra utilizada y a condición de que la inclusión se realice a título de cita, y no
resulten abusivas, ni causen perjuicio a la normal explotación de la obra o que pudiera
perjudicar de forma injustificada a los intereses legítimos del autor o titular.
II. El derecho de cita no se aplica a la utilización de fragmentos de obras con fines de lucro, en
cuyo caso deberá mediar contrato con el titular.
Artículo 52.  Libre utilización para la enseñanza.
Sin perjuicio de lo establecido en los artículos 23 y 24 del presente Libro, son lícitos los siguientes
actos, los cuales no requieren la autorización del titular de los derechos, ni están sujetos aremuneración alguna:
1. Es permitido sin la autorización del autor y sin pago de una remuneración siempre que
se indique la fuente y el nombre del autor, utilizar una obra lícitamente publicada a
título de ilustración de breves extractos en publicaciones, emisiones de radio ograbaciones sonoras o audiovisuales destinadas a la enseñanza y educación.
2. Se permite la reproducción por medios reprográficos de artículos, extractos de obras
breves lícitamente publicadas, para la enseñanza aprovechamiento pedagógico en
instituciones educativas, culturales, científicas, artísticas,  siempre que no haya fines de
lucro, en cuanto justifique el objeto perseguido y con la condición de que se haga
conforme a los usos lícitos.
Artículo 53.  Libre reproducción reprográfica por bibliotecas y archivos.
Sin perjuicio de lo dispuesto por los artículos 23 y 24, una biblioteca o un archivo cuyas actividades
no estén directa o indirectamente encaminadas a obtener un beneficio comercial, podrán, sin laautorización del autor o de cualquier otro titular del derecho de autor, realizar por reproducciónreprográfica, copias sueltas de una obra:
1. Cuando la obra reproducida sea un artículo o una obra corta o un breve extracto de un
escrito distinto o de un programa de ordenador, con o sin ilustraciones, publicado enuna colección de obras o en un número de un diario o de una publicación periódica, ycuando el objetivo de la reproducción sea satisfacer la demanda de una persona natural;
2. Cuando se realice la indicada copia con el fin de preservar y, de ser necesario en caso
de que esté perdida, destruida o inútil, reemplazar un ejemplar, o de reemplazar en una
colección permanente de otra biblioteca o de otro archivo, un ejemplar que se haya
perdido, destruido o que sea inútil, siempre que la indicada obra no se encuentre en el
comercio.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 98
Artículo 54.  Libre utilización con fines de información.
Teniendo en cuenta lo establecido en los artículos 23 y 24 del presente Libro, es permitido sin
autorización del autor y sin pago de una remuneración, pero con sujeción a la obligación de indicar la
fuente y el nombre del autor:
1. La reproducción en la prensa, la radiodifusión o la comunicación al público de artículos
o comentarios sobre economía, política, religión o sobre sucesos de actualidad y de
interés colectivo, o una obra radiodifundida del mismo tipo, siempre y cuando el
derecho de reproducción, radiodifusión y de comunicación al público no esté
expresamente reservado.
2. La reproducción o puesta a disposición del público, con el fin de informar sobre
acontecimientos de actualidad, mediante la fotografía, cinematografía, radiodifusión ola comunicación por cable al público, una obra vista o audible en el transcurso de un
acontecimiento de esa índole, en la medida justificada por el propósito de información
que se persiga.
3. La reproducción en la prensa, radiodifusión o comunicación al público con fines
informativos y en la medida justificada por el objetivo que se persiga, de conferencias,discursos políticos, alocuciones, sermones o cualesquiera otras similares dirigidos al
público, así como discursos pronunciados durante juicios, con fines informativos.
Artículo 55.  Libre utilización de imágenes de obras expuestas permanentemente en lugares
públicos.
Sin perjuicio de lo establecido en los artículos 23 y 24 del presente Libro, es permitido sin
autorización del autor y sin pago de una remuneración:
La reproducción, radiodifusión o comunicación por cable al público de una imagen de una
obra de arquitectura, obra de bellas artes, obra fotográfica o de una obra de artes aplicadas
expuesta permanentemente en lugares abiertos al público, salvo si la imagen de la obra
constituye el elemento principal de la repr oducción, radiodifusión o comunicación y si se
utiliza con fines de lucro.
Artículo 56.  Libre reproducción y ad aptación de programas de ordenador.
I. Sin perjuicio de lo establecido en los artículos 23 y 24 del presente Libro, es permitido sin
autorización del autor y sin pago de una remuneración hacer una copia o la adaptación de ese
programa, a condición de que sea indicada copia o sea mencionada adaptación:
1) Necesaria para la utilización del programa de ordenador a los efectos para los que se
obtuvo el programa, o
2) Necesaria para archivar o para reemplazar el ejemplar lícitamente poseído, en el caso
de que éste se haya perdido, destruido o sea inútil.
II. No estará permitido hacer copias o adaptaciones con fines distintos de los previstos en el
párrafo 1;  toda copia o toda adaptación serán destruidas si la posesión prolongada de la copia
del programa de ordenador dejara de ser lícita.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 99
Artículo 57.  Libre grabación efímera por organismos de radiodifusión.
Sin perjuicio de lo dispuesto por los artículos 23 y 24 del presente Libro, un organismo de
radiodifusión podrá efectuar, sin la autorización del autor y sin pago de otra remuneración, por sus
propios medios y para sus propias emisiones, grabaciones efímeras mediante sus propios equipos ypara su utilización en sus propias emisiones, de una obra sobre la cual tengan el derecho para
radiodifundirla.  El organismo de radiodifusión estará obligado a destruir tal grabación en el plazo de
seis (6) meses.
Artículo 58.  Libre uso de una parodia.
Es permitido realizar la parodia de una obra divulgada, mientras no implique riesgo de confusión con
ésta, ni ocasione daño a la obra o a la reputación del autor, o del artista, intérprete o ejecutante, según
el caso.
Artículo 59.  Libre interpretación o ejecución pública.
Son lícitos los siguientes actos, sin perjuicio de lo establecido en los artículos 23 y 24 del presente
Libro, los cuales no requieren la autorización del titular de los derechos, ni están sujetos a
remuneración alguna:
1. La ejecución y representación de una obra en actos oficiales de instituciones del Estado
o ceremonias religiosas, de asistencia gratuita, siempre que los participantes en la
comunicación no perciban una remuneración específica por su intervención en el acto.
2. En el marco de las actividades de una institución docente, para el personal y los
estudiantes de dicha institución, a condición de que el público se componga
exclusivamente del personal y de los estudiantes de la institución o de los padres yvigilantes o de otras personas directamente vinculadas a las actividades de la
institución.
Artículo  60.  Copia privada.
Respecto a las obras ya divulgadas lícitamente, se permite sin autorización del autor:
1. Las reproducciones fotomecánicas para el exclusivo uso personal, como la fotocopia y
el microfilme, siempre que se limiten a pequeñas partes de una obra protegida o a obras
agotadas y sin perjuicio de la remuneración equitativa que deban abonar a favor de los
titulares, los usuarios, instituciones y demás organizaciones que presten este servicio.
2. Cuando la reproducción mencionada en el numeral anterior, se refiere a una obra
audiovisual o a una obra incorporada en una grabación sonora, el autor o cualquier otro
titular del derecho de autor, tendrá derecho a una remuneración equitativa.
3. La remuneración equitativa, que establece el numeral 2, deberá pagarse:
a) Por el fabricante del equipo o de los soportes materiales u otros conocidos o por
conocerse normalmente utilizados para la reproducción privada con fines
personales de las obras mencionadas en el numeral 2, excepto cuando tal equipo
o soportes materiales se exporten, oIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 100
b) Por los importadores de tal equipo y soportes, salvo cuando la importación la
efectúe una persona individual con fines personales.
4. La remuneración equitativa, establecida en los numerales 1 y 2 precedentes, será
recaudada por la respectiva Sociedad de Gestión Colectiva.  El importe de laremuneración equitativa y las condiciones de su pago serán fijas por la respectiva
reglamentación.
5. Las respectivas Sociedades de Gestión Colectiva, distribuirán el setenta por ciento
(70%) de la remuneración equitativa a los autores u otros titulares del derecho de autor
y derechos conexos, de aquellas obras de las cuales, se determine que han sido objeto
de una reproducción privada, como las establecidas en los numerales 1 y 2.
6. El treinta por ciento (30%) restante de la remuneración serán retenidos por la respectiva
sociedad de gestión colectiva recaudadora.  La reglamentación correspondiente
establecerá, el procedimiento de recaudación de los pagos realizados por los usuarios,
instituciones y demás organizaciones que presten este servicio.
Artículo 61.  Cartas y misivas.
La propiedad material de una carta pertenece a la persona a quien ha sido dirigida, pero su autor
conserva sobre ellas todos los derechos intelectuales.  Las personas a quienes hayan sido dirigidas, si
no obtuvieren la autorización del autor o sus causahabientes luego de haber empleado razonables
esfuerzos para obtenerla, podrán solicitar en la vía sumaria, al Juez Instructor en lo Civil la
autorización para divulgarlas, en forma y extensión necesaria para defender su honor personal.
TÍTULO V
TRANSMISIÓN Y CONTRATOS
CAPÍTULO I
TRANSMISIÓN O SUCESIÓN
Artículo 62.  Transferencia.
I. Los derechos patrimoniales del autor pueden ser transmitidos mediante mandato o presunción
legal, cesión entre vivos o mortis causa o por cualquier medio admitido en derecho.
II. En caso de que en la sucesión de un coautor, su derecho de autor no corresponda a persona o
entidad alguna, acrecerá, por partes iguales a los demás coautores.  El mismo acrecimiento se
producirá cuando un coautor haya renunciado válidamente a su derecho patrimonial de autor.
Artículo 63.  Transferencia de los herederos.
I. Para autorizar cualquier tipo de explotación de la obra, se requerirá del consentimiento de los
herederos que representen la cuota mayoritaria, a través de la Sociedad de Gestión Colectivaque le corresponda.
II. Cuando la mayoría haga uso o explote la obra, deducirá del rendimiento económico total, los
gastos efectuados y entregará la participación que les corresponda a quienes no hubieren
expresado su consentimiento.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 101
CAPÍTULO II
CONTRATOS EN GENERAL
Artículo 64.  Generalidades.
I. El autor o sus causahabientes pueden ceder el derecho patrimonial de explotación de la obra a
otra persona, mediante el uso de una o de todas las formas de explotación reservadas al autor
por el presente Libro, y ceder estos derechos total o parcialmente.
II. Para que estos actos sean oponibles a terceros deberán hacerse por contrato en documento
privado y registrarse en la Oficina Nacional Competente, con las siguientes formalidades
establecidas en el presente Libro.
1. Las diversas formas de explotación son independientes entre sí, toda transmisión de los
derechos de explotación de la obra se regirá por lo pactado en el contrato escrito, sepresume onerosa, durante el tiempo determinado en el mismo, la transmisión exclusiva
debe ser expresamente convenida, se circunscribe en el ámbito territorial pactado.
2. En ningún caso se podrá utilizar la obra o disponer de ella para un sentido o fines
diferentes a lo pactado en la transmisión.
3. En todos los contratos se entiende implícita la facultad de resolver las obligaciones
emergentes de ellos en caso de que uno de los contratantes no cumpliere sus
obligaciones, sin perjuicio de las indemnizaciones que correspondan al perjudicado.
4. Salvo estipulación en contrario, los autores de las obras reproducidas en publicaciones
periódicas conservan su derecho a explotarlas en cualquier forma que no perjudique la
normal publicación en las que se hayan insertado.
5. La transmisión de los derechos de explotación de la obra creada en virtud de una
relación laboral se regirá por lo pactado en el contrato escrito, el autor conservará el
derecho de realizar la edición independiente en forma de colección.
6. Es nula la cesión sobre el conjunto de las obras que el autor pueda crear en el futuro, a
menos que esté expresamente pactada y no exceda de cinco años.
7. Se entenderán reservados en favor del autor o los causahabientes, todos los derechos
que no hayan sido expresamente pactados.
8. La cesión del derecho de reproducción implicará la del derecho de distribución
mediante venta de los ejemplares cuya reproducción se autoriza, cuando ello deduzca
naturalmente del contrato o sea indispensable para cumplir su finalidad.
9. La cesión exclusiva de los derechos patrimoniales, confiere al cesionario el derecho de
uso y explotación exclusiva de la obra, oponible frente a terceros o frente al propioautor, también confiere al cesionario el derecho a otorgar cesiones o licencias a
terceros, expresamente autorizados por el autor o artista y a celebrar cualquier otro acto
o contrato para la explotación lícita de la obra, sin perjuicio de los derechos morales del
autor.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 102
10. En la cesión no exclusiva, el cesionario está autorizado únicamente a explotar la obra
en la forma establecida en el contrato.
11. Es nula cualquier estipulación por la cual se prohíba o comprometa al autor no crear
alguna obra en el futuro.
12. El derecho de utilización de una obra, adquirida por medio de contrato, sólo podrá
cederse a un tercero con el consentimiento del autor y del artista.  Este consentimiento
se considerará otorgado cuando el autor o el artista no lo deniegue dentro del plazo de
quince (15) días siguientes al recibo de la petición escrita del derechohabiente o del
presunto cesionario.  Esta advertencia deberá constar expresamente en la petición.
13. El pleno ejercicio del derecho de renovación se hará efectivo a los sesenta (60) días de
comunicado el autor o sus causahabientes, sin necesidad de ninguna otra formalidad,salvo si el ejercicio del derecho de uso cedido resulte imposible para su titular o si
dicho titular se negare a ejercerlo o si el mencionado plazo fuere con daño emergente o
lucro cesante para el autor.
14. La utilización del derecho de revocación no afecta los derechos y obligaciones de las
partes derivadas del contrato, o de otras disposiciones legales que implicaren el pago deindemnizaciones por daños y perjuicios ocasionados por el incumplimiento de una de
ellas.
Artículo 65.  Las controversias.
Las controversias que surjan entre el cedente y el cesionario serán tramitadas por la vía Civil, si las
partes no acuerdan, someterlas a arbitraje, el mismo que se realizará ante la Oficina NacionalCompetente.
CAPÍTULO III
CONTRATOS DE EDICIÓN
Artículo 66.  Alcances.
Por el contrato de edición, el titular del derecho de autor de una obra literaria o artística o sus
causahabientes, se obliga a entregarla al editor y éste se obliga a reproducirla, distribuirla y
comercializarla por su propia cuenta, pagando al autor las prestaciones económicas convenidas.
Artículo 67.  Regalías.
En todo contrato de edición deberá pactarse la remuneración o regalía que corresponda al autor o
titular de la obra, la que en ningún caso será inferior al diez por ciento (10%) del precio de venta al
público.  A falta de estipulación, se presumirá que corresponde al autor o titular dicho porcentaje.
Artículo 68.  Contenido del contrato.
I. Sin perjuicio de lo que dispone el artículo anterior y de las estipulaciones accesorias que las
partes estimen convenientes, en el contrato deberá constar lo siguiente:
1. Identificación del autor, del editor y de la obra.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 103
2. Si la obra es inédita o no.
3. Si la autorización es exclusiva o no.
4. El plazo y las condiciones en que debe ser entregado el original.
5. El plazo convenido para poner en venta la primera edición.6. El plazo o término del contrato.
7. La cantidad de ejemplares que deben imprimirse en cada edición.
8. La cantidad máxima de ejemplares que pueden editarse dentro del plazo o término del
contrato.
9. La forma cómo será fijado el precio de venta de cada ejemplar al público.  Si no existe
convenio respecto al precio de venta, el editor está facultado a establecerlo, siempre
que no atente a los intereses del autor.
Artículo 69.  Obligación de notificar.
Si el autor ha celebrado con anterioridad un contrato de edición sobre la misma obra, o ha sido
publicada con su autorización o conocimiento, deberá dar a conocer estas circunstancias al editor
antes de la celebración del contrato.  De no hacerlo, responderá de los daños y perjuicios que
ocasionare.
Artículo 70.  Limitaciones del editor.
El editor no podrá publicar la obra con abreviaturas, adiciones, supresiones o cualesquiera otras
modificaciones, sin consentimiento del autor.
Artículo 71.  Otras limitaciones.
I. El editor no podrá disponer el inicio de una nueva impresión o edición que hubiere sido
autorizada en el contrato, sin dar el correspondiente aviso al autor, el que conservará el
derecho de hacer modificaciones, correcciones, enmiendas, adiciones o mejoras que estime
convenientes.
II. Cuando las modificaciones hagan mas onerosa la edición, el autor estará obligado a resarcir
los gastos que por ese motivo se originen, salvo pacto en contrario.
III. Si las modificaciones implicaren cambios fundamentales en el contenido o forma de la obra y
éstas no fueren aceptadas por el editor, se considerará el retiro de la obra, debiendo el autor
indemnizar por daños y perjuicios que se causaren a terceros.
IV. El derecho de editar separadamente una o varias obras del mismo autor, no confiere al editor
el derecho para editarlas conjuntamente.  Asimismo, el derecho de editar las obras conjuntas
de un autor no confiere al editor el derecho de editarlas separadamente.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 104
Artículo 72.  El plazo.
I. Si el contrato de edición tuviere plazo fijo para su terminación y al expirar el editor
conservare ejemplares no vendidos, el autor podrá comprarlos al precio de costo más el diez
por ciento (10%), en el término de sesenta (60) días a partir del vencimiento del plazo,transcurridos los cuales el editor podrá continuar vendiéndolos en las mismas condiciones.
II. Si después de un año de hallarse la obra en venta al público no se hubiere vendido más del
treinta por ciento (30%) de los ejemplares que fueron impresos, el editor podrá dar por
terminado el contrato y liquidar los ejemplares restantes a un precio inferior al pactado o
inicialmente fijado por el editor, reduciendo la remuneración del autor proporcionalmente al
nuevo precio inferior, si éste se hubiera pa ctado en proporción a los ejemplares vendidos.
En este caso el autor tendrá derecho, a comprar los ejemplares no vendidos al nuevo precio de venta
fijado menos un cincuenta por ciento (50%) de descuento, para lo que tendrá un plazo de sesenta (60)
días a partir de la fecha en que el editor le hubiere notificado su decisión de liquidar tales ejemplares.
Si el autor hiciere uso de este derecho de compra, no podrá cobrar regalías por tales ejemplares.
III. El contrato de edición concluye cualquiera sea su plazo de duración al agotarse la edición.
Artículo 73.  Requisitos de la publicación.
Independientemente de los derechos de autor consagrados para las obras literarias, toda persona que
publique una obra está obligada a consignar en lugar visible, en todos los ejemplares, al menos las
siguientes indicaciones:
1. Título de la obra, nombre o seudónimo del autor, o la expresión de que la obra es
anónima, compilador, adaptador o autor de la versión, cuando lo hubiere.
2. La mención de reserva ©, seguido del nombre del titular del derecho de autor, año y
lugar de la primera publicación, y de la publicación actual, precedido del símbolo ©,
nombre y dirección del editor de la edición actual, el del traductor, si lo hubiere y el del
editor de la traducción, siempre que el autor lo requiera las siglas de la sociedad de
gestión que lo representa.
3. Nombre y dirección del editor y del impresor.
4. Número de depósito legal y del registro (ISBN) Número estándar internacional del
libro.
Artículo 74.  Liquidación de regalías.
I. El editor deberá presentar al autor, las liquidaciones que correspondan en proporción a los
ejemplares vendidos, la cual deberá ser pagada en liquidaciones semestrales o en plazos
menores convenidos contractualmente, a partir de la fecha de puesta en venta, reservándose elautor el derecho de examinar los registros y comprobantes de venta de quienes editen,
distribuyan o vendan dichas obras, información que obligatoriamente deberán llevar los
editores, distribuidores y vendedores.
II. La falta del cumplimiento del pago de la referida obligación dará derecho al autor para
rescindir el contrato sin perjuicio del reconocimiento de los daños y perjuicio que se le hayancausado.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 105
Artículo 75.  La quiebra del editor.
La quiebra del editor no produce resolución del contrato, salvo en el caso en que no hubieran iniciado
la impresión de la obra, los derechos del editor quebrado no pueden ser cedidos si se ocasionan
perjuicio al autor o a la difusión de su obra.
Artículo  76.  Derechos del editor.
Durante la vigencia del contrato de edición, el editor tendrá derecho a iniciar y proseguir todas las
acciones consagradas por ley contra los actos de defraudación que perjudiquen su derecho, sin
perjuicio del derecho que tiene el autor y sus causahabientes para adelantar las mismas acciones, en
forma conjunta o separada.
Artículo 77.  Fallecimiento del editor.
Si antes de terminar la elaboración y entrega de los originales de la obra el autor muere o sin culpa se
imposibilita para finalizarla, el editor podrá dar por terminado el contrato, sin perjuicio de los
derechos que se hayan causado a favor del autor.  Si optara por publicar la parte recibida del original,
podrá reducir proporcionalmente la remuneración pactada, a menos que el autor o sus
derechohabientes manifiesten su voluntad de no publicar la obra inconclusa.  En este caso si después
el cedente o sus derechohabientes, ceden el derecho de publicar la obra a un tercero, debenindemnizar al editor por los daños y perjuicios ocasionados por la resolución del contrato.
CAPÍTULO IV
CONTRATOS DE ARTÍCULOS PERIODÍSTICOS
Artículo 78 .  Alcances.
I. Salvo pacto en contrario, la cesión de artículos para periódicos, revistas u otros medios de
comunicación social, solo confiere al editor o propietario de la publicación el derecho de
insertarlo por una sola vez quedando a salvo los demás derechos patrimoniales del cedente.
II. Si el artículo cedido aparece con la debida firma del autor o su seudónimo, el cesionario no
puede modificarlo.  Si el editor o propietario  del medio de comunicación lo modifica, sin el
consentimiento del cedente, éste puede pedir la inserción íntegra y fiel del artículo cedido, sinperjuicio del derecho a reclamar indemnización.
III. Cuando el artículo cedido deba aparecer sin la firma del autor, el editor o propietario del
medio puede hacer modificaciones o cambios de forma, sin el consentimiento del cedente.
IV. Lo establecido en el presente artículo se aplicará en forma análoga, a los dibujos, chistes,
gráficos, fotografías y demás obras susceptibles de ser publicadas en periódicos, revistas u
otros medios de comunicación social.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 106
CAPÍTULO V
CONTRATO DE INCLUSIÓN FONOGRÁFICA
Artículo 79.  Alcances.
I. Por el contrato de inclusión fonográfica el autor de una obra musical, su representante o la
sociedad de gestión colectiva que lo representa, autoriza a un productor de fonogramas, a
cambio de una remuneración, a grabar o fijar una obra para reproducirla sobre un disco
fonográfico, una banda magnética, un soporte digital, una película o cualquier otro dispositivo
o mecanismo análogo, con fines de reproducción y venta de ejemplares.
II. Esta autorización no comprende el derecho de ejecución pública.
III. El productor del fonograma deberá hacer esta reserva sobre la etiqueta que deberá ser
adherida al disco, dispositivo o mecanismo en que se produzca el fonograma.
Artículo 80.  Ámbito de aplicación.
I. El derecho otorgado al productor fonográfico no podrá ir en menoscabo de los derechos de los
artistas, intérpretes y ejecutantes.  Salvo estipulación en contrario, se entenderá que la
autorización de radiodifundir no implica la autorización de:
1. Permitir a otros organismos de radiodifusión que transmitan la interpretación o
ejecución.
2. Fijar la interpretación o ejecución.
3. Fijar la interpretación o ejecución, o reproducir la fijación.
4. Fijar la interpretación o ejecución, y de reproducir esta fijación no implica la
autorización de transmitir la interpretación o la ejecución a partir de la fijación o susreproducciones.
5. El derecho de ejecución pública.
II. Desde el momento en que los artistas intérpretes o ejecutantes autoricen la incorporación de
su interpretación o ejecución en una fijación de sonidos, de imágenes o de imágenes y sonidos
no tendrán aplicación los numerales 2 y 3 precedentes.
III. No deberá interpretarse ninguna de las disposiciones anteriores como limitativa de los
derechos de los artistas intérpretes o ejecutantes, de contratar en condiciones más favorables
para ellos cualquier utilización de su interpretación o ejecución.
Artículo 81.  Obligación del productor en la publicación.
I. El productor fonográfico está obligado a consignar en lugar visible y permanentemente
fijadas, en todos los ejemplares del fonograma, en que la obra haya sido registrada, inclusive
en los eventualmente destinados a la distribución gratuita, las siguientes indicaciones, sin lascuales no podrán ser puestos a la venta:IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 107
1. Título de la obra, nombres de los autores o sus seudónimos, del arreglista u orquestador
y del autor de la versión cuando la hubiere.
2. Si la obra fuere anónima así se hará constar y mientras no se identifique al autor deberá
llevar la sigla:  A.A.D.D. -autor en averiguación, derechos en depósito- seguido delnombre de la sociedad de gestión.
3. Nombres de los intérpretes.  Los conjuntos orquestales o corales serán indicados con
denominación propia y con el nombre de su director.
4. Siglas de las sociedades a que pertenecen los autores y los artistas.
5. La mención de reserva del derecho con el símbolo (P) inscrita dentro de un círculo,
seguido del año de la primera publicación.
6. Denominación del productor fonográfico.7. La frase:  "Quedan reservados todos los de rechos del autor, del artista y productor del
fonograma.  Está prohibida la reproducción, alquiler o préstamo público", o cualquier
otra forma de comunicación pública del fonograma.
II. Las indicaciones que, por falta de lugar adecuado no fuere posible consignar directamente
sobre los ejemplares que contenga la reproducción serán obligatoriamente impresas en elsobre, o folleto adjunto.
Artículo 82.  Regalías.
I. La remuneración mínima del autor por concepto de regalías fonomecánicas será del nueve por
ciento (9%) sobre el precio de venta al públ ico de cada ejemplar vendido que incluya obras
del autor, conforme a las modalidades reconocidas en los contratos colectivos entre lassociedades de autores y compositores y los productores de fonogramas de alcance
internacional.  Se sujeta a esta disposición los fonogramas importados sean de autores
nacionales o extranjeros.
II. Será nulo todo pacto en contrario, a menos de que se trate de mejorar condiciones para el
autor.
III. El productor de fonogramas deberá llevar un sistema de registro que permita la comprobación
en cualquier tiempo de dicha cantidad.
IV. El autor o sus representantes podrán verificar la exactitud de la liquidación correspondiente
mediante la inspección de los talleres, almacenes, depósitos y oficinas del productor, ya sea
personalmente o por representantes autorizados.
V. Cualquier cambio en el precio de venta al públ ico de los fonogramas, deberá ser previamente
notificada a los autores o a la sociedad que lo representa.
VI. Para el desaduanamiento de los fonogramas en cualquier soporte, la autoridad aduanera
requerirá la autorización de la sociedad de gestión correspondiente.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 108
Artículo 83.  Derecho a perseguir judicialmente.
I. El autor, el artista o sus representantes, así como el productor de fonogramas podrán conjunta
o separadamente perseguir en la vía civil, penal o administrativa según corresponda, la
producción o utilización ilícita de los fonogramas o de los dispositivos o mecanismos sobrelos cuales se haya fijado indebidamente la obra.
II. Las disposiciones señaladas en el presente Libro, referentes al contrato de fonograbación se
aplicarán por extensión a las obras literarias que sean utilizadas como texto de una obra
musical o fijadas en el fonograma en forma declamada o como texto impreso adjunto al
fonograma.  El autor de la obra literaria deberá autorizar la utilización de dicho texto en la
grabación o impresión mediante los mecanis mos establecidos por el presente Libro.
CAPÍTULO VI
CONTRATO DE REPRESENTACIÓN
Artículo 84.  Alcance.
I. El contrato de representación es aquel por el cual el autor de una obra literaria, dramática o
dramático-musical, coreográfica o de cualquier género similar, autoriza a una persona natural
o jurídica para representarla en público, a cambio de una remuneración.
II. La difusión de una obra, ya sea en vivo, fijada, o transmitida por radio o televisión se
considerará pública.
Artículo 85.  Obligación de las partes.
I. La obra deberá comenzar a representarse a partir del plazo fijado por el contrato, que no podrá
exceder de un año.  Si no se fijare término a las representaciones, el empresario debemantener la obra en cartel mientras la concurrencia del público lo justifique económicamente.
Caduca la autorización cuando la obra deja de ser representada por falta de público.
II. El empresario está obligado a:
1. Llevar a cabo la representación sin variaciones, adiciones, cortes o supresiones no
consentidas por el autor, siendo responsable por las que efectúen las personas queparticipan en el espectáculo;
2. Garantizar al autor o sus representantes la asistencia a todos los ensayos y la inspección
de la representación y la asistencia a la misma gratuitamente.
III. El autor y el empresario, elegirán de mutuo acuerdo al director y demás intérpretes
principales, y para reemplazarlos será necesario el consentimiento del autor.  Salvo que se
trate de caso fortuito y no admita demora.
IV. En el caso de que la obra no sea representada en el plazo establecido, el empresario deberá
indemnizar al autor mediante una suma que será determinada en el contrato respectivo.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 109
Artículo 86.  Respeto al derecho moral.
El empresario deberá anunciar al público el título de la obra acompañando siempre el nombre o
seudónimo del autor y, en su caso, del traductor y adaptador, indicando las características de la
adaptación.
Artículo 87.  Regalías del derecho patrimonial.
Cuando la remuneración del autor no hubiere sido fijada contractualmente, le corresponderá como
mínimo el diez por ciento (10%) del monto de las entradas recaudadas en cada función o
representación y, el quince por ciento (15%) de la misma, en la función del estreno.
Artículo 88.  Obligatoriedad de la licencia.
I. Las autoridades administrativas competentes autorizarán la realización de espectáculos o
audiciones y expedirán las licencias de funcionamiento cuando el responsable de larepresentación, ejecución o del respectivo establecimiento acredite la autorización o licencia
de los titulares del derecho sobre las obras objeto de ejecución, o de la entidad de gestión
colectiva que administre el repertorio correspondiente.
II. Las autoridades competentes no permitirán audiciones y espectáculos públicos sin la
presentación de la autorización de los titulares de las obras o de las sociedades de gestióncolectivas.
Artículo 89.  Sanciones por incumplimiento al pago de los derechos de autor.
I. Si el empresario, no pagare la participación que corresponde al autor, a solicitud del autor,
representante, titular o sociedad de gestión colectiva que lo represente, la autoridad
competente, ordenará la suspensión de las representaciones de la obra o la retención yembargo del producto de las entradas.
II. En caso de que el mismo empresario represente otras obras de autores diferentes, la autoridad
competente dispondrá la retención de las cantidades excedentes de la recaudación, después de
satisfechos los derechos de autor de dichas obras y los gastos correspondientes, hasta cubrir el
total de la suma adeudada al autor impago.
III. En todo caso el autor tendrá derecho a que se resuelva el contrato y a retirar la obra de poder
del empresario, así como a ejercer las demás acciones a que hubiere lugar.
Artículo 90.  Aplicabilidad y concordancia.
Las disposiciones relativas al contrato de representación son aplicables a las demás modalidades de
comunicación pública, en lo pertinente.
CAPÍTULO VII
OBRA AUDIOVISUAL
Artículo 91.  Alcance.
Sin perjuicio de los derechos de los autores de las obras adaptadas o incluidas en ella, la obra
audiovisual, será protegida como obra originaria.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 110
Artículo 92.  Derecho moral.
El director o realizador de la obra audiovisual es el titular de los derechos morales de la misma, sin
perjuicio de los que correspondan a los diversos autores, y a los artistas intérpretes o ejecutantes quehayan intervenido en ella con respecto a sus propias contribuciones.
Artículo 93.  Coautores.
Son coautores de la obra audiovisual el director o realizador, los autores del argumento, adaptación,
los del guión y diálogos, de las composiciones musicales, con letra o sin ella, creada especialmentepara esa obra y los dibujantes si se tratare de una obra de dibujos animados.
Artículo 94.  Presunción de titular.
I. Sin perjuicio de los derechos que correspondan a los autores, por el contrato de producción de
la obra audiovisual, los derechos de reproducción, distribución, arrendamiento y
comunicación pública, así como los de doblaje o subtitulado de la obra, se presumirán cedidosen exclusiva al productor, con las limitaciones establecidas en este capítulo.
II. Esta presunción no se aplica a los autores de obras musicales en la obra audiovisual.
Artículo 95.  Contenido del contrato de producción.
I. Habrá contrato de producción audiovisual cuando los autores de una obra, del argumento, la
adaptación y los del guión o los diálogos concedan al productor derecho exclusivo para fijarla,reproducirla y explotarla económicamente.
II. El contrato deberá contener:
1. La autorización del derecho exclusivo.
2. La remuneración convenida por el productor a las personas antes mencionadas, a los
autores de las composiciones musicales, con letra o sin ella -creadas especialmente paraesta obra-;  a los dibujantes, si se tratare de una obra audiovisual de dibujos animados, o
que los incluya, al director o realizador y a los intérpretes o ejecutantes que en ella
intervengan, así como las modalidades de pago de dicha remuneración.
3. El plazo para la terminación de la obra.
4. Además de la remuneración, el productor reconocerá al director una participación
autoral del diez por ciento (10%) de las ganancias de la explotación de la obra, una vezdeducidos todos los gastos.
Artículo 96.  Derecho de disposición de los otros autores.
Los autores del argumento, del guión y los de la música, podrán disponer libremente de la parte que
les corresponde de su contribución a la obra audiovisual, para utilizarla por un medio distinto de
comunicación, salvo estipulación en contrario.
Artículo 97.  Prohibición de reproducción.
La cesión del negativo o del medio análogo de reproducción de una obra audiovisual, fotográfica o
análoga de parte de su autor, no presume la cesi ón de los derechos de reproducción, salvo pacto en
contrario.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 111
CAPÍTULO VIII
CONTRATOS DE RADIODIFUSIÓN
Artículo 98.  Alcance.
I. Contrato de radiodifusión es aquel por el cual el titular de los derechos sobre una creación
intelectual autoriza la transmisión de su obra a un organismo de radiodifusión.
II. Estas disposiciones se aplicarán también a las transmisiones efectuadas por hilo, cable, fibra
óptica, u otro procedimiento análogo.
Artículo 99.  Limitación.
I. La autorización para la transmisión de una obra no comprende el derecho de volverla a emitir
ni el de explotarla públicamente, salvo pacto en contrario.
II. Para la transmisión de una obra hacia o en el exterior, se requerirá de autorización expresa de
los titulares.
Artículo 100.  Fijaciones efímeras.
Los organismos de radiodifusión podrán realizar fijaciones efímeras de obras, interpretaciones y
ejecuciones cuyos titulares hayan consentido con su transmisión, con el único fin de utilizarlas en sus
propias emisiones por el número de veces estipulado, y están obligadas a destruirlas o borrarlasinmediatamente después de la última transmisión autorizada.
CAPÍTULO IX
CONTRATOS PUBLICITARIOS
Artículo 101.  Alcance.
I. Son contratos publicitarios los que tengan por finalidad la explotación de obras con fines de
publicidad o identificación de anuncios o de propaganda a través de cualquier medio de
difusión.
II. Sin perjuicio de lo que estipulen las partes, el contrato habilitará la difusión de los anuncios o
propaganda hasta un período máximo de seis meses a partir de la primera comunicación,
debiendo retribuirse separadamente por cada período adicional de seis meses.
III. El contrato deberá precisar el soporte material en los que se reproducirá la obra, cuando se
trate del derecho de reproducción, así como el número de ejemplares que incluirá el tiraje si
fuere el caso, cada tiraje adicional requerirá de un acuerdo expreso.
IV. Son aplicables a estos contratos de modo supletorio las disposiciones relativas a los contratos
de edición, inclusión fonográfica y producción audiovisual.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 112
TÍTULO VI
COMUNICACIÓN PÚBLICA DE OBRAS MUSICALES
CAPÍTULO ÚNICO
OBLIGACIÓN DE LOS USUARIOS
Artículo 102.  Licencia o autorización.
La comunicación pública por cualquier medio, incl usive radiodifusión de una obra musical, con
palabras o sin ellas o cualquier medio de proyección o difusión conocido o por conocerse, habrá de
ser previa y expresamente autorizada por el titular del derecho o sus representantes.
Artículo 103.  Responsabilidad y obligación del usuario.
La persona que tenga a su cargo la dirección de las entidades o establecimientos en donde se realicen
actos de comunicación  pública de obras musicales está obligada a:
1. Anotar en planillas diarias en riguroso orden, el título de cada obra musical ejecutada,
el nombre del autor o compositor de las mismas, el de los artistas intérpretes que en ella
intervengan, o del director de grupo u orquesta en su caso, y el nombre o marca del
grabador cuando la ejecución pública se haga a partir de una fijación fonográfica.
2. Dichas planillas serán fechadas, firmadas y puestas a disposición de los interesados o
representantes, dentro de los treinta (30) días de la fecha en que se efectuó la ejecución
o comunicación al público.  Los interesados o sus representantes, bajo su
responsabilidad, podrán denunciar ante la Oficina Nacional Competente, el
incumplimiento total o parcial de esta obligación y el responsable se hará pasible a una
multa por un monto equivalente a cincuenta veces el importe de la recaudación.
TÍTULO VII
ARTISTAS PLÁSTICOS
CAPÍTULO ÚNICO
DERECHO DE PARTICIPACIÓN
Artículo 104.  Derecho de participación y regalías.
I. Si el original de una obra artística, gráfica, plástica o un manuscrito fuese revendido y en
dicho acto interviniera un comerciante en obras de arte o un subastador, en calidad de
comprador, vendedor o agente, el vendedor deberá pagar al autor o a sus herederos, una
participación equivalente al cinco por ciento (5%) del precio de venta.
II. Este derecho en favor del autor a que se refiere el párrafo anterior es irrenunciable, inalienable
y durará por todo el plazo de protección de los derechos patrimoniales sobre la obra, a favor
del autor, sus herederos y legatarios.
Artículo 105.  Excepción.
Las disposiciones precedentes no serán aplicadas a obras de arquitectura, ni a obras de arte aplicada.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 113
TÍTULO VIII
DERECHOS CONEXOS
CAPÍTULO I
GENERALIDADES
Artículo 106.  Derechos conexos.
La protección ofrecida por las normas del presente título a los artistas, intérpretes y ejecutantes,
productores de fonogramas y organismos de radiodifusión es independiente y no afectará en modo
alguno a la protección del derecho de autor sobre las obras literarias o artísticas, consagradas en el
presente Libro.  En consecuencia, ninguna de las disposiciones contenidas en él, podrá interpretarse
en menoscabo de esa protección.  En caso de conflicto se adopta la que más favorezca al autor.
Artículo 107.  Limitaciones a los derechos conexos.
La información de acontecimientos de actualidad a condición de que sólo se utilicen fragmentos
cortos de una interpretación o ejecución, de un fonograma o de una emisión de radiodifusión.
La reproducción de un fonograma en el marco de actividades docentes, salvo cuando las
interpretaciones o ejecuciones o los fonogramas, hayan sido publicadas como material destinado a la
enseñanza.
CAPÍTULO II
DERECHOS DE LOS ARTISTAS INTÉRPRETES Y EJECUTANTES
Artículo 108.  Alcance.
Los artistas intérpretes y ejecutantes o sus representantes, tienen el derecho de autorizar o prohibir:
I. La fijación y la reproducción, así como la comunicación al público, la transmisión o cualquier
otra forma de utilización de sus interpretaciones y ejecuciones.  En consecuencia, nadie podrá
sin la autorización de artistas, intérpretes o ejecutantes, realizar ninguno de los actos referidos.
II. La primera distribución al público de una fijación de sus interpretaciones o ejecuciones,
mediante la venta o por cualquier otro tipo de transferencia de propiedad.
III. El alquiler al público o el préstamo público de una fijación de sus interpretaciones o
ejecuciones.
IV. La puesta a disposición del público, por hilo o por medios inalámbricos, de sus
interpretaciones o ejecuciones fijadas en un fonograma, de forma de que cada uno pueda tener
acceso a ellas del lugar y en el momento que elija individualmente.
V. Si no se hubiese pactado el termino o plazo de la fijación se presumirá que éste ha sido cedido
por siete años a partir de la primera publicación.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 114
Artículo 109.  Representación legal.
I. Los artistas, intérpretes y ejecutantes que participen colectivamente en una misma actuación
tales como los componentes de un grupo musical, coro, orquesta, ballet o compañía de teatro,
deberán designar de entre ellos, un representante para la concesión de las autorizacionesmencionadas en este artículo.
II. Para tal designación, valdrá el acuerdo mayoritario, que deberá formalizarse por escrito.
Artículo 110.  Término de duración de los derechos conexos.
I. Los derechos reconocidos a los artistas, intérpretes y ejecutantes en el presente Libro tendrán
una duración de setenta (70) años, contados desde el 1º de enero del año siguiente al de su
publicación, de la fijación o al de la interpretación o ejecución si no se hubiera realizado dicha
publicación.
II. El artista intérprete goza del derecho al reconocimiento de su nombre sobre sus
interpretaciones y a oponerse, durante su vida a toda deformación, mutilación o cualquier otro
atentado a su actuación y que lesione su prestigio o reputación.
III. A su fallecimiento y durante el plazo de los setenta (70) años, el ejercicio de estos derechos
corresponderá a los herederos.
IV. El director de escena y el director de orquesta tendrán los derechos reconocidos a los artistas
en el presente Libro.
CAPÍTULO III
PRODUCTORES DE FONOGRAMAS
Artículo 111.  Alcance.
I. El productor fonográfico tiene respecto de sus fonogramas, el derecho exclusivo de autorizar
o prohibir la reproducción, importación, distribución, alquiler, inclusive la distribución por
cable, emisión o satélite o cualquier otro medio de utilización.
II. La primera distribución al público de una fija ción de sus fonogramas, mediante la venta o por
cualquier otro tipo de transferencia de propiedad.
III. La puesta a disposición del público, por hilo o por medios inalámbricos, de sus fonogramas,
de forma de que cada uno pueda tener acceso a ellas del lugar y en el momento que elija
individualmente.
Artículo 112.  Regalías.
I. Cuando un fonograma publicado con fines comerciales o una reproducción de ese fonograma
se utilice con autorización para la radiodifusión o para cualquier otra forma de comunicación
al público, el usuario abonará una remuneración equitativa cada vez que se use, destinada alos artistas, intérpretes o ejecutantes y al productor de fonogramas.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 115
II. El productor de fonogramas o su licenciado y los artistas, intérpretes y ejecutantes o sus
representantes podrán convenir la forma de percibir los derechos de comunicación al público.
Artículo 113.  Duración de la protección para los fonogramas.
La duración de la protección de los fonogramas es de setenta (70) años, a partir del final del año en
que se haya publicado o fijado el fonograma.
Artículo 114.  Titulares y sociedades de gestión.
I. Los fonogramas, que sirvieren para su comunicación pública darán lugar a la percepción de
los derechos a favor de los autores, artistas, intérpretes o ejecutantes y del productor de
fonogramas.
II. El Servicio Nacional de Propiedad Intelectual a través de la Dirección Nacional del Derecho
de Autor propenderá a que la percepción de los derechos de ejecución pública sea efectuadapor una sociedad de gestión para que su distribución quede a cargo de la sociedad respectiva.
CAPÍTULO IV
ORGANISMOS DE RADIODIFUSIÓN
Artículo 115. Derechos exclusivos.
Los organismos de radiodifusión gozarán del derecho exclusivo de autorizar o prohibir los siguientes
actos:
1. la retransmisión de sus emisiones;
2. la fijación de sus emisiones de radiodifusión;
3. la reproducción de una fijación de sus emisiones;  y
4. comunicación al público de sus emisiones de televisión.
Artículo 116.  Duración de la protección para las emisiones de radiodifusión.
La duración de la protección de las emisiones de radiodifusión es de setenta (70) años, a partir del
final del año en que se haya tenido lugar la emisión.
TÍTULO IX
RÉGIMEN FISCAL
CAPÍTULO ÚNICO
PATRIMONIO NACIONAL Y DOMINIO PÚBLICO
Artículo 117.  Alcances.
I. Patrimonio Nacional es el régimen al que pasan las obras de autor boliviano que salen de la
protección del derecho patrimonial privado, por cualquier causa.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 116
II. Pertenecen al patrimonio nacional:
1. Las obras folklóricas y de cultura tradicional y popular de autor no conocido.2. Las obras cuyos autores hayan renunciado expresamente a sus derechos.
3. Las obras de autores fallecidos sin sucesores ni causahabientes.
4. Los himnos patrios, cívicos y todos aquellos que sean adoptados por cualquier
institución de carácter público o privado.
III. Pertenecen al dominio público las obras extranjeras cuyo período de protección esté agotado.
Artículo 118.  Remuneración del derecho y efectos.
I. Para los efectos del numeral 2 del artículo anterior, la renuncia por los autores o herederos de
los derechos patrimoniales de la obra, deberá presentarse por escrito e inscribirse en la Oficina
Nacional Competente para su publicación.
II. La renuncia no será válida contra obligaciones contraídas con anterioridad a la fecha de la
misma.
Artículo 119.  Uso y explotación gratuito y oneroso.
La utilización bajo cualquier forma o procedimiento de obras del patrimonio nacional y del dominio
público será libre, pero quien lo haga comercialmente, pagará al Estado representado legalmente por
la Oficina Nacional Competente, una participaci ón cuyo monto no será menor del diez por ciento
(10%) y no mayor del cincuenta por ciento (50%) de aquel monto que se pague a los autores o sus
causahabientes por utilización de obras similares sujetas al régimen privado de protección, respetando
los derechos morales correspondientes.
Artículo 120.  Destino de las regalías.
I. Los montos recaudados por concepto de utilización de obras del patrimonio nacional y
dominio público, se aplicarán únicamente y exclusivamente al fomento y difusión de los
valores culturales del país.
II. Las sociedades de gestión colectiva, de acuerdo con la Oficina Nacional Competente,
realizarán esos cobros en calidad de agentes de retención.
Artículo 121.  Beneficios del recopilador y de las comunidades de origen.
El Estado a través de la Oficina Nacional Competente reconocerá del porcentaje recaudado por obras
de patrimonio nacional y dominio público, un cuarto para la Oficina Nacional Competente, un cuarto
para el recopilador, un cuarto para la sociedad de gestión que corresponda y un cuarto para la
comunidad de origen a través de las Organizaciones Territoriales de Base.
Artículo 122.  Porcentajes a aplicar por uso y explotación de las obras.
Se aplicarán a aquellas que utilicen obras del patrimonio nacional y dominio público, una
participación cuyo monto será del diez por ciento (10%) y no mayor del cincuenta por ciento (50%)que el que se pague a los autores o sus causahabientes por utilización de obras similares sujeto al
régimen privado de protección, de acuerdo a los siguientes porcentajes:
1. Libros en general de literatura, arte y ciencias:  diez por ciento (10%);IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 117
2. Venta de obras originales de las artes plásticas:  veinte por ciento (20%);
3. Representaciones teatrales, dramático-musicales, coreográficas y cinematográficas:
treinta por ciento (30%);
4. Ejecuciones musicales en locales públicos:  cuarenta por ciento (40%);5. Emisiones radiales o de televisión con o sin hilos y grabaciones de obras musicales:
cincuenta por ciento (50%).
TÍTULO X
REGISTRO NACIONAL DE DERECHO DE AUTOR
CAPÍTULO ÚNICO
GENERALIDADES
Artículo 123.  Registro Nacional de Derecho de Autor.
I. El Registro Nacional de Derecho de Autor es público y tiene por objeto establecer un sistema
de registro que permita la ejecución eficiente de control, seguimiento y disposición del
derecho de autor y derechos conexos garantizando mayor seguridad jurídica a los autores,
titulares de los derechos conexos y titulares de los derechos patrimoniales correspondientes y
sus causahabientes, así como dar una adecuada publicidad a las obras, actos y documentos através de su inscripción.
II. Las obras literarias y artísticas y los derechos conexos están protegidos aun cuando no sean
registrados.
III. El Registro Nacional de Derecho de Autor dependiente de la Dirección Nacional de Derecho
de Autor de la Oficina Nacional Competente, tiene competencia para tramitar las solicitudesde inscripción de obras, actos y contratos que se refieren a los derechos de autor, de las
sociedades de autores, de artistas, intérpretes y ejecutantes y de las demás funciones que se
asignen por el presente Libro.
Artículo 124.  Derechos y acciones a registrar.
El Registro Nacional de Derecho de Auto r, observará las siguientes disposiciones:
1. En el Registro Nacional de Derecho de Autor podrán inscribirse:
a) Las obras que presenten sus autores voluntariamente para ser registradas.
b) Convenios o contratos que de cualquier forma confieran, transmitan, graven o
extingan derechos patrimoniales de autor o por los que se autoricen
modificaciones de una obra.
c) Las escrituras, estatutos y reglamentos de las diversas sociedades de autores así
como sus reformas y modificaciones, los de las sociedades de artistas intérpreteso ejecutantes y sus reformas, nombramientos y cese de sus directorios,
administradores y apoderados, tarifas generales y sus modificaciones.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 118
d) Los convenios o pactos que celebran las sociedades de autores y de artistas
intérpretes o ejecutantes con las sociedades extranjeras.
e) Los poderes otorgados a personas individuales o colectivas para realizar
gestiones ante la Oficina Nacional Competente, cuando la representaciónconferida abarque todos los asuntos que el mandante haya de tramitar en él y no
esté limitado a la gestión de un solo asunto.
f) Los mandatos que otorguen los miembros de las sociedades de gestión colectiva
a favor de éstas.
h) Los convenios o contratos relativos a derechos conexos.
i) Los nombres propios de los autores que, utilizando seudónimo, deseen conservar
su anonimato.  Este depósito deberá hacerse en sobre lacrado.
j) Las características gráficas y distintivas de obras.
2. Para las obras anónimas, la inscripción se hará con el nombre de la persona individual o
colectiva responsable de la divulgación.  Igual tratamiento se seguirá con las obras
seudónimas, salvo el caso en que el seudónimo esté registrado.
3. Las obras póstumas deberán ser registradas a nombre del autor.  Este registro podrán
hacerlo los herederos o legatarios o cualquier otra persona individual o colectiva.
4. Los actos que se transfieran por acto entre vivos o mortis causa otorgan fe, previo
registro, salvo prueba en contrario de la existencia de la obra, interpretación,
producción o radiofónica, y del hecho de su divulgación y publicación, así como la
autenticidad y seguridad jurídica.
Artículo 125.  Obligaciones del Registro de Derecho de Autor.
El Registro de Derecho de Autor tiene las siguientes obligaciones:
1. Inscribir, cuando proceda, las obras y los documentos que le sean presentados.
2. Proporcionar a las personas que lo soliciten información de las inscripciones y de los
documentos que obran en el Registro, salvo lo dispuesto en los parágrafos siguientes:
a) tratándose de programas de computación, de contratos de edición y de obras
inéditas, la obtención de copias sólo se permitirá mediante autorización del
titular del derecho patrimonial o por mandamiento judicial;
b) cuando la persona o autoridad solicitante requiera de una copia de las constancias
de registro, el Instituto expedirá copia certificada, pero por ningún motivo se
permitirá la salida de originales del Registro.  Las autoridades judiciales o
administrativas que requieran tener acceso a los originales, deberán realizar lainspección de los mismos en las oficinas del Registro Nacional del Derecho de
Autor;
c) cuando se trate de obras fijadas en soportes materiales distintos del papel, la
autoridad judicial o administrativa, el solicitante o, en su caso, el oferente de laIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 119
prueba, deberán aportar los medios técnicos para realizar la duplicación.
Las reproducciones que resulten con motivo de la aplicación de este artículo
únicamente podrán ser utilizadas como constancias en el procedimiento judicial
o administrativo de que se trate, y
3. Rechazar la inscripción de:
a) lo que no es objeto de protección conforme al artículo 12 del presente Libro;
b) las obras que son del dominio público;
c) las obras ya registradas en tanto se resuelva el conflicto de titularidad de la obra;
d) las marcas, a menos que se trate al mismo tiempo de una obra artística y la
persona que pretende aparecer como titular del derecho de autor lo sea también
de ella;
e) leyes, decretos, resoluciones y otros;
f) la inscripción de cualquier documento cuando exista alguna anotación marginal,
que suspenda los efectos de la inscripción, proveniente de la notificación de un
juicio relativo a derechos de autor o de la iniciación de una averiguación previa,
y
g) en general los actos y documentos que en su forma o en su contenido
contravengan o sean ajenos a las disposiciones del presente Libro.
Artículo 126.  Impugnación del registro.
El registro de una obra podrá ser impugnado por cualquier persona natural o jurídica o por el Estado,
si la autoría de quien la tiene registrada quedare en duda.  En este caso, los efectos de la inscripciónquedarán suspendidos en tanto se pronuncie resolución firme sobre la autoría, por la Oficina Nacional
Competente o en la vía ordinaria civil.
Artículo 127.  Presunción de titularidad.
Se presume salvo prueba en contrario, que las personas indicadas en el registro son los titulares del
derecho que se les atribuye en tal carácter.
TÍTULO XI
SOCIEDADES DE GESTIÓN COLECTIVA
CAPÍTULO ÚNICO
SOCIEDADES DE GESTIÓN COLECTIVA DE AUTORES Y ARTISTAS
Artículo 128.  Constitución de las sociedades de gestión colectiva.
I. Las sociedades de gestión colectiva de autores y titulares de derechos conexos que se
constituyan de acuerdo con este Libro, en concordancia con el artículo 58 del Código Civil,serán de interés público.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 120
II. Las sociedades de gestión tendrán personería jurídica y patrimonios propios de acuerdo a las
disposiciones que establece el presente Libro.
III. No podrá constituirse más de una sociedad para cada rama o especialidad literaria o artística
de los titulares reconocidos por este Libro.
Artículo 129.  Reconocimiento.
I. El reconocimiento de las sociedades de gestión colectiva de autores y de artistas, intérpretes o
ejecutantes, previo trámite de su personalidad jurídica por los canales correspondientes, será
conferido mediante resolución de la Oficina Nacional Competente, a través de la Dirección de
Derecho Autor.
II. Las sociedades de gestión colectiva una vez reconocidas por la Oficina Nacional Competente,
serán las únicas con potestad para percibir y liquidar en todo el territorio de la República y elexterior, en virtud de convenios de reciprocidad, los derechos económicos derivados de la
utilización por cualquier medio o modalidad de las obras por ellas protegidas.
III. Las personas naturales o jurídicas, nacionales o extranjeras destinatarias finales de los
derechos económicos, deberán actuar necesariamente a través de la sociedad respectiva, sin
perjuicio de ejercer directamente los derechos que les confiere el presente Libro.
Artículo 130.  Efectos del reconocimiento de la sociedad de gestión.
I. El reconocimiento de las sociedades de gestión colectiva, por parte de la Oficina Nacional
Competente a nombre del Estado, las habilitará legalmente para reclamar ante los usuarios o
sus representantes, el pago de las regalías y la defensa de los derechos mencionados en el
presente Libro.
II. La Oficina Nacional Competente otorgará a las sociedades un certificado de habilitación de
funcionamiento de la sociedad que será exhibido en lugar visible en sus establecimientos.
III. Las sociedades de acuerdo a su género, deberán otorgar a los representes y cobradores
credenciales autorizadas por la Dirección Nacional de Derecho de Autor, que llevará un
registro de los mismos.  El cambio de representantes y cobradores, deberá ser comunicado a laDirección de Derecho de Autor por la sociedad correspondiente.
Artículo 131.  Géneros de sociedades de gestión colectiva.
I. Sin perjuicio que nuevos géneros aparezcan en el futuro, se establecen los siguientes géneros
de constitución de Sociedades de Gestión Colectiva.
1. Literatos, que incluyen a novelistas, ensayistas, historiadores, científicos, poetas,
conferencistas y catedráticos.
2. Autores dramáticos, dramático-musicales y de obras pantomímicas.3. Autores y compositores, de música incluidos los letristas y los coreógrafos de obras de
danza.
4. Artistas plásticos como ser, pintores, escultores, grabadores, arquitectos, dibujantes,
escenógrafos, diseñadores gráficos y artesanos.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 121
5. Cineastas, videastas y fotógrafos;  productores, directores y guionistas;
6. Creadores de programas de ordenador o computadora (soporte lógico o software).
II. Igualmente se establecen Sociedades de Derechos Conexos para los artistas intérpretes o
ejecutantes, sean estos:
1. músicos, cantantes o instrumentistas;2. actores, mimos, recitadores, y bailarines.
III. El reconocimiento de las sociedades de gestión colectiva de autores y de artistas intérpretes o
ejecutantes, previo trámite de su personalidad jurídica por los canales correspondientes, seráconferido mediante resolución de la Oficina Nacional Competente.
IV. Solo podrá constituirse una sociedad en cada rama de creación literaria, artística, o de
derechos conexos.  Una misma persona podrá pertenecer a más de una sociedad.
Artículo 132.  Facultades de las sociedades de gestión colectiva.
Las sociedades de gestión colectiva de autores, de artistas intérpretes o ejecutantes tienen las
facultades siguientes:
1. Establecer procedimientos de recaudación, administración, liquidación de derechos de
autor y conexos, pudiendo coordinar con otras sociedades de distinto género, la formade aplicarlos.
2. Determinar las condiciones a las que deberán ajustarse los contratos con los usuarios,
siempre que no contravengan al presente Libro.
3. Conceder o negar las autorizaciones que se establezcan en los contratos en general y en
los contratos en particular que no contravengan el presente Libro.  Para el caso de las
autorizaciones, las sociedades instrumentarán los medios para garantizar elcumplimiento de la voluntad del autor o intérprete.
4. Fijar los respectivos aranceles de cobranza periódica por cada modalidad de uso,
percibiendo y liquidando los mismos de acuerdo a los estatutos de cada sociedad.
5. Firmar toda clase de documentación relacionada con los derechos de autor o intérprete.6. Exigir a los usuarios el pago de los aranceles que se establezcan, así como la
presentación de declaraciones juradas, planillas de ejecución, programas, catálogos,
listados de publicaciones y todo otro elemento de verificación que permita y garanticela correcta percepción y liquidación de los derechos.
7. Controlar y verificar la exactitud de las constancias o manuscritos presentados por los
usuarios, incluyendo la documentación respaldatoria de las liquidaciones denunciadas
por los mismos.
8. Efectuar el control de ingreso de personas, en la venta de obras y de taquillas o de otras
formas de contribución, el uso correcto de las obras autorizadas y de todo otro valorresultante o modalidad aplicable, que se determine como base para la fijación dearanceles correspondientes al cobro del derecho de autor y del intérprete.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 122
9. Retener, como establecen las normas y prácticas internacionales un treinta por ciento
(30%) de los ingresos totales, para gastos de administración y funcionamiento.
10. Interponer las acciones que crean convenientes ante autoridades administrativas,
policiales y judiciales, para prohibir el uso de repertorio y de obras que no estuvierandebidamente autorizadas, sean nacionales o extranjeras.
11. Efectuar a cabo toda otra acción necesaria para lograr el objeto y cumplimiento del
presente Libro y de las obligaciones señaladas para las sociedades.
12. Asumir defensa del derecho moral y patrimonial de autor.
13. Representar a sus socios, a los demás autores o artistas de su género y a sus respectivos
derecho habientes, ante autoridades administrativas, judiciales y terceros, en todos los
asuntos de interés general y particular para los mismos y suscribir contratos en materiade derecho de autor y derechos conexos, en los términos y con las limitaciones
impuestas en el presente Libro y los respectivos estatutos.
14. Las sociedades de gestión colectiva serán las mandatarias de los autores e intérpretes
para todos los fines de esta materia.
15. Recaudar y liquidar a favor de los autores e intérpretes las percepciones pecuniarias
provenientes de los derechos que les correspondan.  Para el caso de los asociados, serán
retenidos en su favor para el posterior pago, dentro un plazo a ser determinado en los
estatutos de la sociedad, que no podrá ser mayor a los cinco (5) años.  Vencido el plazo
de los referidos fondos se destinarán servicios a favor de socios, ancianos o impedidos,
a través del fondo social de la sociedad de gestión.
16. Recaudar y entregar a la Oficina Nacional Competente, las percepciones
correspondientes a la utilización de obras pertenecientes al patrimonio nacional y del
dominio público.
17. Celebrar convenios con las sociedades de gestión colectiva nacionales de distinto
género mencionadas en este artículo y con otras extranjeras de la misma rama o afines,y titulares de derechos conexos, con base a la reciprocidad.
18. Representar en el país a las sociedades extranjeras y ser representada en el exterior, en
virtud del mandato específico o de pacto de reciprocidad celebrado por las mismas
sociedades.
19. Los demás actos que no contravengan lo establecido por el presente Libro, y por los
propios estatutos.
Artículo 133.  Derechos del autor y titulares.
I. Las remuneraciones establecidas en el presente Libro a favor del creador, el intérprete, artista
o ejecutante de una obra, serán de concertación directa entre éste y el interesado que desee
hacer usufructo de la misma, aunque las sociedades podrán constituirse, a pedido del autor o
intérprete, en representantes para dicha concertación.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 123
II. Las disposiciones del presente título no menoscabarán la facultad de los autores de obras y de
sus sucesores, ni de los titulares de derechos conexos, de ejercer directamente los derechosque les confiere el presente Libro.
Artículo 134.  Celebración de contratos.
Los autores y los titulares de derechos conexos o las sociedades que los representan podrán celebrar
contratos con los usuarios y con las organizaciones que los representan respecto a la utilización de sus
obras.  Las retribuciones concertadas en dichos contratos no podrán ser contrarias a lo que establece elpresente Libro.
Artículo 135.  Registros de actos y contratos.
Las sociedades de gestión colectiva deberán registrar en la Oficina Nacional Competente los
nombramientos, y el cese de sus administradores y apoderados, las tarifas generales y sus
modificaciones, los contratos celebrados con asociaciones de usuario y los celebrados con similares
extranjeras.
Artículo 136.  Informe a los titulares.
I. Las sociedades de gestión colectiva deberán de suministrar a sus socios y representantes una
información periódica, completa y detallada de todas las actividades de la organización quepuedan interesar al ejercicio de sus derechos.
II. Similar información debe ser enviada a las entidades extranjeras con las cuales mantengan
contratos de representación en el territorio nacional.
TÍTULO XII
PROTECCIÓN Y OBSERVANCIA DEL DERECHO DE AUTOR
Y LOS DERECHOS CONEXOS
CAPÍTULO I
DISPOSICIONES GENERALES
Artículo 137.  Acciones civil, administrativa o penal.
I. La violación de cualquiera de los derechos de autor  establecidos en este Libro, dará lugar a las
acciones civil o administrativa;  sin perjuicio de la acción penal a que hubiere lugar, si elhecho estuviese tipificado como delito.
II. Los procesos penales a que den lugar las infracciones al presente Libro son de acción pública
y serán de conocimiento de la judicatura penal, de acuerdo con el Código Penal, Código de
Procedimiento Penal, Ley de Organización Ju dicial, Ley Orgánica del Ministerio Público  y el
presente Código.
Artículo 138.  Presunción de autor.
Para que el titular de los derechos de autor y derechos conexos reconocidos en el presente Libro, sea
admitido como tal ante cualquier autoridad judicial o administrativa, bastará que el nombre o
seudónimo, o cualquier otra denominación que no deje dudas sobre la identidad de la persona
individual o colectiva de que se trate, conste en la obra, interpretación o ejecución, producción o
emisión de radiodifusión, en la forma usual.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 124
Artículo 139.  Petición del titular afectado.
I. En caso de infracción de los derechos reconocidos en el presente Libro, se podrá demandar:
1. La cesación de los actos violatorios.
2. El decomiso definitivo de los productos u otros objetos resultantes de la infracción, así
como su destrucción, sin indemnización alguna.
3. El decomiso definitivo de los instrumentos y medios empleados para cometer la
infracción sin indemnización alguna.
4. El decomiso definitivo de los instrumentos y medios para almacenar copias, sin
indemnización alguna.
5. El lucro cesante o la indemnización de daños y perjuicios.
6. La reparación en cualquier otra forma, de los efectos generados por la violación del
derecho.
7. El valor total de las costas procesales.
8. El derecho de información sobre la identidad de los terceros que hayan participado en
la producción y distribución de los bienes o servicios infractores y sobre los circuitos de
distribución.
II. Podrán exigirse también los derechos establecidos en los convenios internacionales vigentes
en Bolivia, especialmente los determinados en el Acuerdo sobre los Aspectos de los Derechos
de Propiedad Intelectual relacionados con el Comercio (ADPIC) de la Organización Mundial
del Comercio (OMC).
Artículo 140.  Prohibición general para autorizar.
Ninguna autoridad, ni persona natural o jurídica podrá autorizar la utilización de una obra,
interpretación, producción fonográfica o emisión de cualquier otra prestación protegida por este
Libro, o prestar apoyo para su utilización, si el usuario no cuenta con la autorización expresa y previa
del titular del derecho, su representante o la sociedad de gestión colectiva correspondiente.  En caso
de incumplimiento será solidariamente responsable.
Artículo 141.  Responsabilidad solidaria.
I. Si la violación de los derechos se realiza a través de redes de comunicación digital, tendrá
responsabilidad solidaria el operador o cualquier otra persona natural o jurídica que tenga el
control de un sistema informático interconectado a dicha red, a través del cual se permita,
induzca o facilite la comunicación, reproducción, transmisión o cualquier otro acto violatorio
de los derechos previstos en este Libro y, siempre que tenga conocimiento o haya sido
advertido de la posible infracción, o no haya podido ignorarla sin negligencia grave de suparte.
II. Los operadores u otras personas naturales o jurídicas referidas en esta norma, estarán exentos
de responsabilidad por actos y medidas técnicas que adopten a fin de evitar que la infracción
se produzca o continúe.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 125
Artículo 142.  Medidas preparatorias.
I. El juez o tribunal competente para conocer acciones en materia civil en virtud del presente
Libro estará facultado, además de la medidas preparatorias establecidas en el Código deProcedimiento Civil y en los términos que estime razonables, para:
1. Expedir requerimientos para prohibir la comisión, o para ordenar el cese, de la
infracción de cualquier derecho protegido en virtud del presente Libro.
2. Ordenar el secuestro de ejemplares de obras protegidas o de fonogramas de las que se
tengan indicios que hayan sido reproducidas, realizadas o importadas sin autorización
del titular del derecho protegido en virtud del presente Libro, cuando la realización o la
importación de los ejemplares estén sujetas a autorización, así como de los embalajes
de esos ejemplares, de los medios que puedan haberse utilizado para realizarlas y de losdocumentos, cuentas o papeles de negocios relativos a dichos ejemplares.
II. Las disposiciones del Código de Procedimiento Civil relativas al secuestro se aplicarán en lo
pertinente a las infracciones de los derechos protegidos en virtud del presente Libro.
III. Las disposiciones de la Ley General de Aduanas relativas a la suspensión de la puesta en libre
circulación de mercancías de la que se tengan indicios que puedan ser ilegales se aplicarán en
lo pertinente a los objetos o al material protegidos en virtud del presente Libro.
SECCIÓN ÚNICA
ARBITRAJE Y CONCILIACIÓN
Artículo 143.  Procedencia.
I. En caso de que surja alguna controversia sobre los derechos protegidos por el presente Libro,
las partes podrán someterse a un procedimiento de arbitraje o conciliación el cual estáregulado conforme a la Ley Nº 1770 de Arbitraje y Conciliación de 10 de marzo de 1997.
II. La Dirección de Derecho de Autor a través del Órgano Nacional Competente publicará en el
mes de enero de cada año una lista de las personas autorizadas para fungir como árbitros en la
materia.
CAPÍTULO II
PROCESO CIVIL EN DERECHO DE AUTOR
Y DERECHOS CONEXOS
SECCIÓN I
DISPOSICIONES COMUNES
Artículo 144.  Jueces y tribunales competentes.
I. Son competentes para conocer las acciones civiles sobre esta materia, de acuerdo a la cuantía,
los Jueces de Instrucción en lo Civil y los Jueces de Partido en lo Civil, y los recursos segúncorrespondan, los Jueces de Partido en lo Civil y las Cortes Superiores de Distrito a través de
la Sala Civil correspondiente.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 126
II. Los recursos de casación que se dedujeren en esta materia serán conocidas por la Corte
Suprema de Justicia de la Nación a través de su Sala Civil respectiva.
Artículo 145.  Competencia.
I. La competencia en materia de Derecho de Autor y Derechos Conexos se fija de conformidad
con las normas establecidas en el Código de Procedimiento Civil y el presente artículo.
II. La competencia será determinada,  tratándose de transmisiones a través de un satélite, cuando
la infracción sea cometida en el lugar en que se iniciare dicha transmisión o bien en el lugar
en que la señal se hiciere accesible al público.
III. En caso de infracciones cometidas a través de redes de comunicación digital, se tendrán
cometidas las mismas, en el lugar en que se encuentren los sistemas informáticos o bien en el
lugar en que la transmisión se hiciere accesible al público.
Artículo 146.  Facultades de los jueces.
Con el objeto de evitar que se produzca o continúe la infracción a cualquiera de los derechos
reconocidos en el presente Libro, evitar que las mercancías ingresen en los circuitos comerciales,
inclusive las mercancías importadas, o bien para las pruebas pertinentes relacionadas con la presunta
infracción, los jueces están facultados a ordenar, a petición de parte, las medidas cautelares opreliminares que fueren necesarias para la protección urgente de tales derechos y, en especial:
1. El cese inmediato de la actividad ilícita.
2. La suspensión de la actividad de la utilización, explotación, venta, oferta en venta,
importación o exportación, reproducción, co municación, distribución, según proceda.
3. Cualquier otra que evite la continuación de la violación de los derechos.
Artículo 147.  Medidas cautelares.
Las medidas cautelares relativas al Derecho de Autor y Derechos Conexos, en materia civil, se
tramitarán de conformidad con las normas pertinentes del Código de Procedimiento Civil.
Artículo 148.  Medidas cautelares y presunción de autor.
I. El juez ordenará las medidas preventivas y cautelares al conocimiento de la demanda, siempre
que se acompañen pruebas que permitan razonablemente presumir la violación actual o
inminente de los derechos de autor y derechos conexos, o sobre información que conduzca al
temor razonable y fundado sobre su violación actual o inminente, atenta la naturaleza
preventiva o cautelar de la medida y la infracción de que pueda tratarse.
II. El juez comprobará si la parte solicitante es titular de los derechos, a cuyo efecto se estará a
las presunciones establecidas en este Libro.  En defecto de información proporcionada con la
demanda que permita presumir la titularidad, bastará la declaración jurada que al efecto se
incluya en la demanda.
Artículo 149.  Contracautela.
I. El juez exigirá al actor, de acuerdo a las circunstancias, que preste fianza o garantía suficiente
en preservación de daño posible al demandante, para proteger y evitar abusos.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 127
II. La garantía no se exigirá cuando el solicitante fuere el Estado, Municipio o un beneficiario de
gratuidad.
III. El monto de la garantía que fije el juez de be guardar relación con el daño emergente o el lucro
cesante establecido en la demanda.
Artículo 150.  Secuestro.
I. El secuestro podrá ordenarse sobre los ingresos obtenidos por la actividad infractora, sobre
bienes que aseguren el pago de la indemnizaci ón, sobre los productos o mercancías que violen
el derecho de autor y derechos conexos, así como sobre los equipos, aparatos y medios
utilizados para cometer la infracción y sobre los ejemplares originales que hayan servido para
la reproducción o comunicación.
II. La retención se ordenará sobre los valores correspondientes por conceptos de explotación o
remuneración.
III. El arraigo, se ordenará si el demandado no tuviere domicilio o establecimiento permanente en
Bolivia.
Artículo 151.  Otras facultades del juez.
I. Las medidas adoptadas serán ejecutadas en presencia del juez, si el actor así lo requiere, quien
podrá asesorarse de los peritos necesarios o de funcionarios de la Oficina Nacional
Competente cuyo dictamen en la propia diligencia constará del acta correspondiente y servirá
para la ejecución.
II. Además de las medidas provisionales y cautelares establecidas en el Código de Procedimiento
Civil, la orden que expida el juez conforme con el artículo precedente implicará, sin necesidadde formalidad ulterior o providencia adicional, la posibilidad de adoptar cualquier disposición
necesaria para la plena ejecución de la medida cautelar, incluyendo la apertura de seguridades
y sin perjuicio de que al momento de la diligencia el juez  ordene otra medida cautelar que
resulte necesaria para la protección urgente de los derechos, sea de oficio o a petición verbal
de parte.
Artículo 152.  Cese de actividad ilícita.
La resolución del juez que ordene el cese inmediato de la actividad ilícita podrá comprender:
1. La suspensión de la actividad infractora o la prohibición al infractor de reanudarla, o
ambas.
2. Cuando las mercancías infractoras o ejemplares ilícitos constituyan parte sustancial del
comercio habitual del infractor, la resolución que se expida ordenará la clausura
provisional del local o establecimiento.
3. El retiro del comercio de las mercancías, ejemplares ilícitos u objetos infractores y, su
depósito judicial.
4. La inutilización de los bienes u objetos materia de la infracción y, en caso necesario, la
destrucción de moldes, planchas, matrices, instrumentos, negativos, plantas o partes de
aquéllas y demás elementos utilizados en la reproducción o comunicación noIP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 128
autorizada, o de aquellos cuyo uso predominante sea facilitar la supresión o
neutralización de cualquier medio de protección técnica o de información electrónica y
que sirvan predominantemente para actos violatorios del derecho de autor y derechos
conexos.
5. Cualquier otra medida que resulte necesaria para la protección urgente de los derechos
de autor y derechos conexos atenta la naturaleza y circunstancias de la infracción.
Artículo 153.  Reserva en las medidas cautelares.
Las demandas que se presenten a fin de obtener una medida cautelar, así como las providencias
correspondientes, tendrán la categoría de reservadas y no se notificarán a la parte demandada sino
hasta después de su ejecución.
Artículo 154.  Reserva en la inspección judicial.
Si el actor indicare que para la prueba de la violación de los derechos se requiere de inspección
judicial previa, el juez la dispondrá sin notificar a la parte contraria y podrá ordenar durante la
diligencia las medidas cautelares pertinentes.  Para este fin concurrirá con los funcionarios judiciales y
policías que deban cumplir y garantizar tales medidas.
Artículo 155.  Depósito judicial.
I. En caso de obras fijadas electrónicamente en dispositivos de soportes digitales o por
procedimientos análogos, o cuya aprehensión sea difícil o pueda causar graves daños al
demandado, el juez, previo consentimiento del actor y si lo considera conveniente, podrá
ordenar que los bienes secuestrados permanezcan bajo la custodia del demandado, luego de
identificados, individualizados e inventariados, sin perjuicio del secuestro de las fijacionessobre soportes removibles.
II. El juez deberá poner sellos o señales sobre los bienes identificados, individualizados e
inventariados.
Artículo 156.  Efectos de las medidas cautelares.
I. Cumplida la medida cautelar se proseguirá de acuerdo a lo establecido en el Código de
Procedimiento Civil para el proceso ordinario.
II. En los casos en que las medidas provisionales sean revocadas o caduquen por acción u
omisión del demandante, o en aquellos casos en que posteriormente se determine que no hubo
infracción o amenaza de infracción del derecho de autor y derechos conexos, el juez
competente ordenará al actor, previa petición del demandado, la indemnización de daños y
perjuicios.
Artículo 157.  Confidencialidad de la información .
I. A fin de proteger secretos comerciales o información confidencial, en el curso de la ejecución
de las medidas cautelares establecidas en este Libro, únicamente  tendrán acceso a la
información, códigos u otros elementos, en cuanto sea indispensable para la práctica de la
medida el juez, perito designado, demandante o demandado o sus representantes.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 129
II. Todos los que  tengan acceso a tales informaciones, quedarán obligados a guardar absoluta
reserva y quedarán sujetos a las acciones que ésta y otras leyes prescriban para la protección
de los secretos comerciales y la información confidencial.
Artículo 158.  Peritos.
En ejecución de las medidas cautelares o en el período de prueba, podrán intervenir como peritos los
funcionarios designados por la Oficina Nacional Co mpetente.  El juez podrá requerir la intervención
pericial de tales funcionarios, a solicitud de parte o de oficio.
También podrán intervenir como peritos representantes de las sociedades de gestión colectiva que
corresponda.
Artículo 159.  Destino de copias y embalajes.
I. Cuando existan ejemplares cuya realización haya supuesto una infracción de los derechos, las
autoridades judiciales, en ejecución de sentencia, están facultadas para ordenar que se
destruyan esos ejemplares y sus embalajes o para adoptar otra disposición con respecto a esos
ejemplares y embalajes fuera de los circuitos comerciales, con el objeto de evitar perjuicios al
titular del derecho, salvo si éste solicita otra cosa.
II. Esta disposición no se aplicará a aquellos ejemplares ni a sus embalajes cuya propiedad haya
sido adquirida por terceros de buena fe.
Artículo 160.  Destino de material.
I. Cuando exista el peligro de que se utilice material para cometer, o para seguir cometiendo,
actos que constituyan una infracción, las autoridades judiciales en ejecución de sentencias
ordenaran, que se:
1. destruya el material;
2. disponga de él de otra manera fuera de los circuitos comerciales, a fin de reducir al
mínimo los riesgos de nuevas infracciones;  o
3. sea entregado al titular del derecho.
II. Cuando exista el peligro de que persistan los actos que constituyen en una infracción, las
autoridades judiciales ordenarán expresamente el cese de dichos actos y  fijarán un importe a
pagar por concepto de multa.
Artículo 161.  Sanción por negligencia u omisión.
I. Los jueces que no cumplan con lo previsto para las medidas precautorias establecidas en el
Código de Procedimiento Civil dentro de las cuarenta y ocho horas siguientes a la recepción
de la demanda o  nieguen injustificadamente la adopción de una medida cautelar, serán
responsables ante el titular del derecho por los daños causados, sin perjuicio de la acciónpenal que corresponda.
II. Esta norma se hará extensiva a los jueces en lo penal que establezcan medidas cautelares en lo
que corresponda al Código de Procedimiento Penal.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 130
Artículo 162.  Prescripción del derecho.
I. Las acciones civiles prescriben de conformidad con las normas del Código Civil
respectivamente, salvo las acciones por violación a los derechos morales, que son
imprescriptibles.
II. Salvo prueba en contrario y, para los efectos de la prescripción de la acción se tendrá como
fecha de perpetración de la infracción, el primer día del año siguiente a la última edición,
reedición, reproducción, comunicación, u otra utilización de una obra, interpretación,
producción o emisión de radiodifusión.
Artículo 163.  Observancia a tratados y excepción.
I. Los jueces observarán adicionalmente los procedimientos y medidas establecidos en
convenios o tratados internacionales sobre propiedad intelectual vigentes en Bolivia, encuanto sean aplicables.
II. Los jueces estarán exentos de responsabilidad en los términos del artículo 48 numeral 2 del
Acuerdo sobre los Aspectos de los Derechos de Propiedad Intelectual relacionados con el
Comercio (ADPIC).
SECCIÓN II
PROCESO ORDINARIO DE CONOCIMIENTO
Artículo 164.  Procedencia.
I. El proceso ordinario para resolver los conflictos de propiedad intelectual referidos a las
materias de derecho de autor y derechos conexos, propiedad industrial, protección a las
obtenciones vegetales y a los esquemas de trazado de los circuitos integrados, se sujeta alprocedimiento previsto en la presente sección.
II. La demanda será precedida necesariamente de la conciliación, sin perjuicio de las medidas
preparatorias que se hubieren solicitado.
Artículo 165.  Procedimiento.
I. Agotada la vía conciliatoria, el proceso se iniciará con la presentación de la demanda, que
deberá reunir los requisitos de forma y contenido señalados en el Código de Procedimiento
Civil.
II. Dictada la providencia de admisión de la demanda, en ella se correrá traslado y se ordenará la
citación del demandado.
III. Citado legalmente, el demandado deberá contestar en el plazo de treinta días.
IV. A tiempo de la contestación, el demandado podrá reconvenir.  Se correrá traslado de la
reconvención al actor, para que conteste en el mismo plazo de treinta días.
V. Si se opusieren a la demanda o la reconvención excepciones previas, se conferirá traslado al
actor o al demandado, según fuere el caso, por un plazo de 15 días.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 131
VI. Transcurridos los plazos señalados, con contestación o sin ella, se convocará a audiencia
preliminar.
Artículo 166.  Rebeldía.
I. Si transcurrido el plazo para la contestación, el demandado no compareciere, podrá ser pedida
su rebeldía por el actor.
II. Declarada la rebeldía, se notificará al demandado en su domicilio.  Todas las actuaciones y
resoluciones posteriores se notificarán en estrados, excepto la sentencia, salvo la pronunciada
en audiencia.
III. La rebeldía del demandado determinará que el juez tenga por admitidos los hechos alegados
por el actor, en cuanto no fueren contradicho por la prueba ofrecida, que podrá ser
diligenciada en todo lo que el tribunal considere necesario.
IV. El actor podrá pedir el embargo de los bienes del rebelde u otras medidas cautelares
consideradas necesarias, las cuales subsistirán hasta la conclusión de la causa o hasta el
levantamiento de la rebeldía, si hubiere lugar.
V. El rebelde podrá comparecer en cualquier momento del proceso y tomará la causa en el estado
en que se hallare.
VI. Si el actor fuere declarado rebelde, el demandado será absuelto, salvo que mediare
reconvención, en cuyo caso el proceso continuará hasta sentencia.
Artículo 167.  Audiencia preliminar.
I. Convocada audiencia preliminar, las partes comparecerán en forma personal, excepto motivo
fundado que justificare la comparecencia por representante.
Las personas colectivas y los incapaces comparecerán por intermedio de sus representantes.
Si hubiere de suspenderse por inasistencia de una de las partes, atribuible a razón de fuerza
mayor insuperable, la audiencia podrá diferirse por una sola vez.
II. La inasistencia no justificada del actor se tendrá como desistimiento de la pretensión, con
todos sus efectos.
III. La inasistencia del demandado facultará al juez o tribunal para dictar sentencia de inmediato,
teniendo por ciertos los hechos alegados por el actor en todo cuanto no se hubiere probado lo
contrario.
Artículo 168.  Actividades en la audiencia preliminar.
En la audiencia preliminar se cumplirán las siguientes actividades:
1. ratificación de la demanda y de la contestación, y en su caso, de la reconvención y su
contestación;  igualmente, alegación de hechos nuevos que no modifiquen laspretensiones o las defensas, así como aclarar extremos oscuros, contradictorios o
imprecisos a juicio del juez o de las partes;IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 132
2. tentativa de conciliación que deberá realizar el juez respecto de todos o algunos de los
puntos controvertidos;
3. recepción de prueba relativa a excepciones, si existieren hechos que, siendo
susceptibles de prueba, ésta hubiere sido propuesta juntamente con las excepciones;
4. saneamiento del proceso, pronunciándose sentencia interlocutoria que resuelva las
excepciones previas o nulidades advertidas por el juez o acusadas por la parte,
incluyendo lo incongruente de la demanda y la legitimación en la causa, cuando éstas
puedan ser resueltas al comienzo de la sustanciación;
5. prórroga de la audiencia cuando no se hubiere podido producir la totalidad de la prueba
o dictar la sentencia de saneamiento.  En el primer caso, podrá diferirse la recepción
hasta otra audiencia que se realizará en plazo no mayor de 10 días, y en el segundocaso;
6. fijación definitiva del objeto del proceso;  determinación, ordenamiento y diligencia de
los medios de prueba admisibles, necesarios y pertinentes;  recepción de las pruebas
cuya diligenciamiento fuere posible en la audiencia, o convocatoria a audiencia
complementaria respecto de las que no se hubieren producido hasta su conclusión.
Las partes podrán proponer nuevos medios de prueba que, a juicio del juez, se refieran a
hechos nuevos o rectificaciones hechas en la propia audiencia.
Artículo 169.  Resoluciones y recursos en la audiencia preliminar.
I. Las resoluciones pronunciadas en la audiencia preliminar admitirán los siguientes recursos:
1. Las providencias de mero trámite, recurso de reposición proponible en la misma
audiencia y definible en forma inmediata por el juez;
2. La sentencia interlocutoria que resolviere excepciones previas, recurso de apelación
con efecto diferido;
3. La sentencia interlocutoria que resolviere las excepciones de incompetencia del juez,
prescripción o caducidad, transacción o conciliación y cosa juzgada, recurso deapelación en el efecto suspensivo, que deberá anunciarse en la propia audiencia e
interponerse en la forma prevista por el Código de Procedimiento Civil.
II. Igualmente, en esta audiencia podrán adoptarse las siguientes medidas:
1. si la sentencia interlocutoria declarare probada la excepción de litispendencia, se
ordenará, según corresponda, el archivo de obrados o la acumulación;
2. si se acogiere la excepción de demanda defectuosa, el demandante podrá subsanar los
defectos en la misma audiencia, en cuyo caso se permitirá al demandado complementarsu contestación en mérito de las aclaraciones formuladas por el actor;
3. si se acogiere la excepción de falta de capacidad, personería o representación, se
concederá un plazo de 10 días para la subsanación de lo omitido, bajo apercibimiento
de tenerse por no presentada la demanda;IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 133
4. si se dispusiere la intervención de un tercero, se procederá a su citación conforme a
derecho.  En este caso, como en el anterior, se suspenderá la audiencia a sus efectos,
por el plazo señalado en el numeral anterior.
III. Las excepciones, nulidades y otras cuestiones propuestas por las partes serán resueltas en una
sola sentencia dictada en audiencia para sanear el proceso, salvo que el juez o tribunal se
declare incompetente, en cuyo caso no se resolverán otras cuestiones.
IV. Si el asunto fuere de puro derecho o, siendo de hecho, se hubiere diligenciado totalmente la
prueba, o se resolviere prescindir de la aún no diligenciada, serán oídas las alegaciones de las
partes y se pronunciará sentencia definitiva.
V. Todo cuanto expusiere, declarare u ordenare el juez en la audiencia preliminar no significa
prejuzgamiento.
Artículo 170.  Audiencia complementaria.
I. Si en la audiencia preliminar no se hubiere podido diligenciar totalmente la prueba, se
convocará a las partes para audiencia complementaria que se realizará dentro de los 15 días
siguientes, durante cuya vigencia se verificarán necesariamente las diligencias que se hubiere
dispuesto realizar fuera de audiencia, como inspecciones, pericias, informes y otras similares,a fin de que estén cumplidas en oportunidad de la audiencia complementaria.
II. No se suspenderá la audiencia complementaria, ni se dejará de diligenciar la prueba por
ausencia de una de las partes, salvo el único caso de fuerza mayor debidamente comprobada.
La audiencia podrá ser prorrogada, por única vez, de oficio o a petición de parte, si faltare
diligenciamiento de alguna prueba que deba cumplirse fuera del asiento judicial, en cuyo casoel juez fijará nueva fecha para reanudación de la audiencia.
III. La inasistencia de la parte a la audiencia complementaria significa presunción desfavorable
para ella.
IV. En la audiencia complementaria serán recibidos todos los medios de prueba.  Los testigos y
peritos, una vez oídos por su orden, permanecerán en el acto a efecto de aclaraciones o careosposibles, salvo autorización del juez para su retiro.
V. Se labrará acta resumida de todo lo actuado y se acumularán al expediente los informes y
demás documentos recibidos.  En particular, fuera de las aclaraciones o complementaciones
de las partes, se harán constar las resoluciones del juez sobre la admisión o rechazo de alguna
prueba controvertida, así como sobre la interposición de recursos.
VI. Los testigos y peritos firmarán el Libro de Asistencia del juzgado, sin que sea necesaria la
suscripción del acta.
VII. El juez oirá seguidamente los alegatos de las partes, a cuyo objeto fijará el tiempo necesario
que no excederá de 10 minutos para cada una y que podrá ser prorrogado por un lapso similar.
Por excepción, tratándose de asuntos de notoria complejidad, también podrá conceder una
ampliación que satisfaga la necesidad de alegaciones adecuadas a dicha situación.
VIII. A continuación, el juez pronunciará sentencia observando lo dispuesto por el artículo
siguiente.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 134
Artículo 171.  Plazos para dictar sentencia.
I. Los jueces deberán dictar sentencia al cabo de la audiencia complementaria, en cuya
oportunidad se dará lectura a la misma a los efectos de su notificación.
II. El juez podrá diferir la fundamentación del fallo para una ulterior audiencia, que se realizará
en plazo no mayor de 10 días si se tratare de sentencia interlocutoria y de 20 para la sentencia
definitiva.  Los plazos para impugnar se contarán a partir del día siguiente a la celebración de
esta última audiencia.
III. Tratándose de casos complejos, se podrá prorrogar el plazo para dictar la sentencia con sus
fundamentos, por 15 días si fuere interlocutoria y por 30 días si fuere definitiva,
procediéndose conforme a lo dispuesto en el parágrafo anterior.
Artículo 172.  Segunda instancia.
I. La segunda instancia se abre como efecto de apelación concedida.
II. Recibido el expediente, será pasado a estudio del juez en forma simultánea.
III. Finalizado el estudio por el tribunal, si no se hubiere resuelto dictar decisión anticipada, se
convocará a audiencia para fines de mejora de la alzada o diligenciamiento de la prueba que el
tribunal hubiere dispuesto, de oficio o a petición de parte.  Si no fuere necesario eldiligenciamiento de prueba, se formulará igual convocatoria a audiencia para dictar sentencia.
IV. La sentencia será dictada en la forma y plazos previstos en el artículo 171.
Artículo 173.  Casación.
En los casos en que hubiere lugar al recurso de casación, se procederá conforme a las regulaciones
previstas por el  Código de Procedimiento Civil.
Artículo 174.  Ejecución de sentencia.
Las sentencias se ejecutarán observando las regulaciones del Código de Procedimiento Civil.
Artículo 175.  Multa.  Daños y perjuicios.
I. Las sentencias condenatorias de las acciones civiles por violación de derechos de autor y
derechos conexos impondrán al infractor adicionalmente una multa de tres a cinco veces elvalor total de los ejemplares de obras, interpretaciones, producciones, emisiones o de la
regalía que de otro modo hubiere percibido el titular del derecho por explotación legítima de
éstas u otras prestaciones de derecho de autor y derechos conexos.
II. Las multas que conforme a estas disposiciones se recauden se destinarán en un tercio (1/3) a
la Oficina Nacional Competente, en un tercio (1/3) al titular del derecho infringido y un tercio
(1/3) al Tesoro Judicial.
III. La indemnización de daños y perjuicios comprenderá el daño emergente y el lucro cesante,
causadas por la infracción.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 135
La cuantía de los ingresos no obtenidos, se fijará teniendo en cuenta, entre otros, los
siguientes criterios:
1. los beneficios que el titular hubiese obtenido de no haberse producido la violación;
2. los beneficios obtenidos por el infractor como consecuencia de la violación;3. el precio, remuneración o regalía que el infractor hubiese tenido que pagar al titular,
para la explotación lícita de los derechos violados;  y,
4. los gastos razonables, inclusive honorarios profesionales, incurridos por el titular con
relación a la controversia.
Artículo 176.  Corresponsabilidad de terceros.
El propietario, socio, gerente, director o responsable de las actividades de los establecimientos donde
se realicen  presentaciones de teatro o musicales, responderá solidariamente con el organizador del
espectáculo, por las violaciones a los derechos de autor que tengan lugar en aquellos establecimientos,
sin perjuicio de las responsabilidades penales que correspondan.
CAPÍTULO III
DELITOS Y EL PROCESO PENAL
SECCIÓN I
DELITOS
Artículo 177.  Delito contra el Derecho de Autor y Derechos Conexos.
Será sancionado con pena privativa de libertad de cuatro (4) a seis (6) años de reclusión y multa de
sesenta (60) a cien (100) días, quien:
1. en relación con una obra o producción literaria o artística inédita y sin autorización del
autor, artista o productor, o de sus causahabientes, la inscriba en el registro o la
publique por cualquier medio de reproducción, multiplicación o difusión, como si fuere
suya o de otra persona distinta del autor verdadero, o con el título cambiado o
suprimido, o con el texto alterado dolosamente;
2. en relación con una obra o producción publicada y protegida cometa cualesquiera de
los hechos indicados en el inciso anterior, o sin permiso del titular del derecho de autor,
la reproduzca, adapte, transforme, modifique, refunda o compendie y edite o publique
algunos de estos trabajos por cualquier modo de reproducción, multiplicación o
comunicación al público;
3. reproduzca una obra ya editada, alterando dolosamente en la edición fraudulenta el
nombre del editor autorizado al efecto;
4. reproduzca un fonograma o videograma con miras a su comercialización, o los alquile
sin autorización escrita de su productor o su representante;  asimismo, el que importe,
almacene, distribuya o venda las copias ilícitas de un fonograma o un videograma;IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 136
constituye un ejemplar ilícito de un fonograma o un videograma, el que imitando o no,
las características externas del ejemplar legítimo tiene incorporado el fonograma o elvideograma o parte sustancial de él, sin la autorización de su titular;
5. edite, venda, reproduzca o difunda una obra editada o fonograma mencionando
falsamente el nombre del autor, del editor autorizado, de los intérpretes y ejecutantes o
del productor;
6. presentare declaraciones falsas destinadas, directa o indirectamente a perjudicar los
derechos económicos de autor, sea alterando los datos referente al producto económico
de un espectáculo, el número de ejemplares  producidos, vendidos o distribuidos de una
obra, comunicación pública, regalías o por cualquier otro medio;
7. introduzcan al país, fabriquen, almacenen, ofrezcan en venta, vendan arrienden o de
cualquier otra manera pongan en circulación o a disposición de terceros aparatos u
otros medios destinados a descifrar las señales codificadas o de cualquier otra manera
burlar o quebrantar los medios técnicos de protección aplicados al titular del derecho;
8. fabriquen o importen, para la venta o el alquiler, un dispositivo o un  medio
especialmente concebido o adaptado para volver inoperante todo dispositivo o medio
encaminado a impedir o a limitar la reproducción de una obra o a deteriorar la calidad
de los ejemplares realizados;
9. importen o distribuyan con fines de emisión y comunicación al público, sin estar
habilitados para ello, de obras, interpretaciones o ejecuciones, fonogramas o emisiones
de radiodifusión, sabiendo que se han suprimido o modificado sin autorización
informaciones relativas a la gestión de derechos que se presentan en forma electrónica.
Todo ejemplar en el que se haya suprimido o modificado una información sobre la
gestión de derechos, serán asimilados a las copias o ejemplares falsificados de obra.
Artículo 178.  Comunica ción sin autorización.
Será sancionado con tres (3) a cinco (5) años de reclusión y multa de sesenta (60) a cien (100) días el
que:
1. emita, retransmita o difunda por cualquier medio, obras cinematográficas sin
autorización del productor;  y
2. retransmita por cualquier medio las emisiones de los organismos de radiodifusión.
Artículo 179.  Importación de obras ilícitas.
Serán sancionados con tres (3) a cinco (5) años de reclusión y multa de sesenta (60) a cien (100) días
quienes introduzcan al país, almacenes, ofrezcan en venta, vendan, arrienden o de cualquier otramanera pongan en circulación o a disposición de terceros reproducciones ilícitas de obras.
Artículo 180.  Reproducción ilícita.
Serán sancionados de tres (3) meses a dos (2) años de reclusión y multa de sesenta (60) días.
quienes:
1. reproduzcan mayor número de ejemplares de los autorizados por el titular del derecho
de autor, o sus causahabientes en el respectivo contrato;IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 137
2. reproduzcan, difundan, ejecuten, representen o distribuyan una o más obras después de
vencido el término de una autorización concedida al efecto.
Artículo 181.  Autor o representante indebido.
Será sancionado de tres (3) meses a dos (2) años de reclusión y multa de sesenta (60) días quien:
1. sin autorización del titular del derecho de autor sea responsable por la representación o
ejecución públicas de obras teatrales o musicales;
2. sin ser autor, editor, causahabiente o representante de uno o de alguno de ellos, se
atribuya falsamente una de esas calidades y obtenga que la autoridad suspenda la
representación de la ejecución pública de una obra;
3. se apropie indebidamente del derecho de uso de nombres de periódicos, revistas,
secciones y columnas de los mismos, programas de radio y televisión, noticieroscinematográficos, de los demás medios de comunicación, de los personajes ficticios o
simbólicos en obras literarias, historietas gráficas y otras publicaciones periódicas o de
personajes característicos empleados en actuaciones artísticas o de nombres de grupos y
conjuntos, coros, orquestas, bandas y otros elencos artísticos.
Artículo 182.  Alteración de obras.
Será sancionado de tres (3) meses a dos (2) años de reclusión y multa de sesenta (60) días quien altere
o mutile una obra, inclusive a través de la remoción o alteración de información electrónica sobre el
régimen de derechos aplicables.
Artículo 183.  Sanción a la obstrucción de justicia.
Serán sancionados con reclusión de seis meses a dos años y multa de cien a cuatrocientos días multa,
quienes ilícitamente obstaculicen, incumplan o impidan la ejecución de una providencia preventiva
cautelar emitida por autoridad judicial o administrativa competente.
Artículo 184.  Agravantes.
Son circunstancias agravantes, las siguientes:
1. que la persona que cometió el delito haya sido apercibida sobre la violación del
derecho;
2. que los delitos se cometan respecto de obras inéditas;
3. que los productos materia de la violación de los derechos puedan provocar daño a la
salud.
En todos estos casos la pena será elevada en un tercio (1/3) teniendo en cuenta la magnitud del daño.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 138
SECCIÓN II
PROCESO PENAL
Artículo 185.  Competencia.
I. Son competentes para conocer las acciones penales por delitos cometidos contra los derechos
de autor y derechos conexos, en primera instancia, los Jueces de Sentencia y los Tribunales de
Sentencia, según el delito perseguido tenga una pena máxima que supere o no los cuatro años
de privación de libertad.
II. En Segunda Instancia, son competentes, las Cortes Superiores de Distrito, a través de la Sala
Penal correspondiente.
III. Los recursos de casación que se dedujeren en esta materia, serán conocidos por la Corte
Suprema de Justicia, a través de la Sala Penal respectiva.
Artículo 186.  Acción penal pública.
La investigación y juzgamiento de los delitos contra el derecho de autor y los derechos conexos se
regirá por las normas establecidas en el Código de Procedimiento Penal con las consideraciones
establecidas en los artículos siguientes.
Artículo 187.  Medidas cautelares reales.
Las medidas cautelares reales relacionadas con el Derecho de Autor y Derechos Conexos, en materia
penal se tramitarán de conformidad con las normas del Código de Procedimiento Civil.
En la ejecución de las medidas cautelares reales, dispuestas para garantizar la reparación del daño y
pago de costas o multas establecidas en el Código de Procedimiento Penal, se preverá también la
destrucción de los ejemplares ilícitos o adjudicación al titular del derecho defraudado u otradisposición que no implique retorno al circuito comercial.
Artículo 188.  Incautación.
I. En todos los casos contenidos en este capítulo, durante el proceso, se dispondrá la incautación
de todos los objetos que hubieren servido directa o indirectamente para la comisión del delito,
de conformidad con el Código de Procedimiento Penal.
II. La Dirección de Registro, Control y Administración de bienes incautados será la responsable
de custodiar los ejemplares de una obra publicada o reproducida en forma ilícita.
Artículo 189.  Destino de las obras incautadas.
I. A fin de que no retornen al circuito comercial, el Juez o Tribunal podrá ordenar en ejecución
de sentencia la destrucción de los ejemplares y sus embalajes, o la adjudicación al titular del
derecho defraudado de los ejemplares, embalajes o instrumentos que hayan sido utilizados
para la comisión del delito.
II. Esta disposición no se aplicará a los ejemplares, embalajes, ni a los instrumentos cuya
propiedad haya sido adquirida por terceros de buena fe para su uso personal.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 139
Artículo 190.  Destino de las multas.
El producto de las multas determinadas en este capítu lo será destinado en un cuarto (1/4) al titular del
derecho infringido, un cuarto (1/4) al Fondo de Indemnizaciones del Poder Judicial, un cuarto (1/4) al
Ministerio Público y un cuarto (1/4) a la Oficina Nacional Competente, estos últimos destinarán esosfondos en programas de formación y educación sobre propiedad intelectual.
CAPÍTULO IV
PROCEDIMIENTO ADMINISTRATIVO DE DERECHO
DE AUTOR Y DERECHOS CONEXOS
Artículo 191.  Oficina Nacional Competente, Dirección de Derecho de Autor.
De la Oficina Nacional Competente depende la Dirección de Derecho de Autor, es la autoridad
nacional responsable de cautelar y proteger administrativamente el derecho de autor y los derechosconexos;  posee autonomía técnica y funcional para el ejercicio de las funciones asignadas a su cargo
y resuelve en primera y en segunda instancia las causas administrativas y no contenciosas que le sean
sometidas a su jurisdicción, por denuncia de parte o por acción de oficio.
Artículo 192.  Procedimiento administrativo.
I. Sin perjuicio de las acciones civiles y penales que se interpongan ante las autoridades
judiciales competentes, los titulares de cualquiera de los derechos reconocidos en la
legislación sobre derecho de autor y derechos conexos, o sus representantes, podrán denunciar
la infracción de sus derechos ante la Dirección de Derecho de Autor en su condición de
autoridad administrativa competente;  no constituyendo esta última, en ninguno de los casos,
vía previa.
II. Las acciones por infracción iniciadas de oficio o a solicitud de parte, se sujetarán al
Procedimiento Administrativo General que establece la Ley de Procedimiento Administrativo.
III. Agotada la vía administrativa, el interesado  podrá acudir a la impugnación judicial por la vía
del proceso contencioso-administrativo ante el Juez en Materia Administrativa.
Artículo 193.  Solicitud de medidas cautelares.
I. Sin perjuicio de lo establecido en la Ley de Procedimiento Administrativo, los titulares de
cualesquiera de los derechos reconocidos en este Libro o sus representantes, sin menoscabo
de otras acciones que les corresponda, podrán pedir, bajo su responsabilidad y riesgo, el cese
de la actividad ilícita del infractor en los términos previstos en este capítulo.
II. Con este fin, la Dirección de Derecho de Autor, tendrá la facultad de ordenar medidas
cautelares rápidas y eficaces para:
1. Evitar una infracción de cualesquiera de los derechos reconocidos en el presente Libro
y, en particular impedir la introducción en los circuitos comerciales de mercancías
presuntamente infractoras, incluyendo medidas para evitar la entrada de mercancías
importadas.
2. Conservar las pruebas pertinentes relacionadas con la presunta infracción.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 140
Artículo 194.  Medidas cautelares.
I. Las medidas cautelares serán entre otras:
1. La suspensión o cese inmediato de la actividad ilícita.2. La incautación, decomiso o retiro de los circuitos comerciales de los ejemplares
producidos o utilizados y del material o equipos empleados para la actividad infractora.
3. La realización de inspección, incautación o decomiso sin aviso previo.
4. Requerimiento de información.
La medida cautelar de incautación o decomiso, podrá solicitarse dentro de un procedimiento
administrativo de denuncia, sin perjuicio de las acciones de oficio.
II. Las medias cautelares se tramitarán de acuerdo al procedimiento establecido en el Código de
Procedimiento Civil.
Artículo 195.  Requisitos para la medida cautelar.
I. El solicitante de medidas cautelares, debe cumplir con presentar ante la autoridad
administrativa, las pruebas a las que tenga acceso y que la autoridad considere suficientes paradeterminar que:
1. el solicitante es el titular del derecho o se presuma la calidad de titular o autor;
2. el derecho del solicitante está siendo infringido o que dicha infracción es inminente;
3. cualquier demora en la expedición de esas medidas podría causar un daño irreparable al
titular del derecho, o
4. existe un riesgo comparable de que se destruyan las pruebas.
II. El solicitante debe proporcionar además, toda la información necesaria para identificar los
bienes objeto de las medidas y el lugar donde éstos se encuentran.
Artículo 196.  Obligación de informar.
Cuando se presuma la violación de derechos de autor o conexos, el Director de la Oficina Nacional
Competente o el Director de Derecho de Autor podrá requerir a terceros que le proporcionen cualquierinformación que permita establecer la existencia o no de tal infracción.  Dicha información deberá serentregada en un término no mayor de 10 días, desde la fecha de la notificación.
Artículo 197.  Facultad de la Dirección de Derecho de Autor para ordenar medidas cautelares.
I. La Dirección de Derecho de Autor tiene la facultad para ordenar medidas preventivas o
cautelares en virtud de la solicitud de una sola parte, sin necesidad de notificar previamente a
la otra, en especial cuando haya posibilidad de que cualquier retraso cause daño irreparable altitular del derecho o exista riesgo inminente de que se destruyan las pruebas.
II. Las peticiones que se presenten para obtener medidas cautelares permanecerán en reserva
hasta luego de ejecutadas y, aun con posterioridad deberán adoptarse por las autoridades las
medidas necesarias para preservar la confidencialidad de la información no divulgada quehaya debido suministrarse en el curso del procedimiento.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 141
Artículo 198.  Reserva de inspección y medidas cautelares.
I. Las inspecciones se realizarán por el Director de Derecho de Autor o sus delegados
departamentales, entregando copia de la resolución administrativa que la hubiere ordenado y,
si fuese aplicable, la solicitud de la parte afectada.
II. Si durante la diligencia se comprobare, aun presuntivamente, a primera vista, la violación de
derechos de autor o derechos o hechos que reflejen inequívocamente la posibilidad inminente
de tal violación, se procederá a la formación de un inventario detallado de los bienes, de
cualquier clase que estos sean, que se relacionen con tal violación.  Se dejará constancia de lo
examinado por los medios que de mejor manera permitan apreciar el estado de las cosas
inspeccionadas.
III. La Oficina Nacional Competente, a través del Director de Derecho de Autor o sus delegados
departamentales, podrá adoptar cualquier medida cautelar de protección urgente, de los
derechos a que se refiere este Libro, si se acompañan a la pretensión cautelar las pruebas.
Estas medidas tendrán carácter provisional y estarán sujetas a revocación o confirmación.
Artículo 199.  Prohibición del titular o sociedad.
Anunciada o de cualquier modo conocida la comunicación pública de una obra legalmente protegida
sin que se hubiere obtenido la autorización correspondiente, el titular de los derechos o la sociedad
que los representa podrá solicitar a la Oficina Nacional Competente que la prohíba, lo cual será
ordenado inmediatamente.  Al efecto se presume que el organizador, empresario o usuario no cuenta
con la debida autorización.
Artículo 200.  Destino de los bienes incautados.
I. La Dirección de Derecho de Autor, luego de ejecutoriada la resolución administrativa
definitiva correspondiente, podrá ordenar la entrega al titular del derecho afectado a una
institución sin fines de lucro, de las obras reproducidas ilegalmente y cualquiera de los
materiales e instrumentos u tilizados para la comisión de la infracción, u ordenar la
destrucción de los mismos.
Si no se apersonase a la Dirección de Derecho de Autor el titular del derecho afectado
después de transcurridos 20 días de la correspondiente notificación, la autoridad podrá
disponer del material ilícito.
II. La determinación y selección de la institución sin fines de lucro, a que se refiere el parágrafo
anterior, será determinada por Directorio de la Oficina Nacional Competente.
III. Las medidas cautelares no se aplicarán respecto del ejemplar adquirido de buena fe y para el
exclusivo uso personal.
Artículo 201.  Intervención de la policía nacional.
A requerimiento del titular o representante legal o de la sociedad de gestión colectiva que lo
represente, la autoridad policial comprobará de inmediato, la comisión de cualquier acto infractor del
presente Libro, entregando copia de constancia al interesado.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 142
Artículo 202.  Denuncia penal.
I. Cuando los hechos materia del procedimiento administrativo constituyan presunto delito, la
Dirección de Derecho de Autor podrá formular denuncia penal y remitir antecedentes al
Ministerio Público.
II. En caso que la Dirección de Derecho de Autor hubiere destruido o dispuesto de los ejemplares
que constituían materia de la infracción del Derecho de Autor o de los Derechos Conexos, se
acompañará a la denuncia copia certificada de la resolución administrativa correspondiente,
así como copias de las actas vinculadas a tales medidas en las que consta la relación de bienes
objeto de las mismas, a efectos de su valoración como prueba del presunto delito.
SECCIÓN I
INFRACCIONES
Artículo 203.  Infracciones en materia de derecho de autor.
I. Se considerará como infracción y falta grave aquella que realizare el infractor, vulnerando
cualquiera de los derechos y en la que concurran al menos alguna de las siguientes
circunstancias:
1. La vulneración de cualquiera de los derechos morales reconocidos en el presente Libro.2. El obrar con ánimo de lucro o con fines de comercialización, sean estos directos o
indirectos.
3. La presentación de declaraciones falsas en cuanto a certificaciones de ingresos,
repertorio utilizado, identificación de los titulares respectivos, autorización
supuestamente obtenida, número de ejemplares o toda otra adulteración de datossusceptible de causar perjuicio a cualquiera de los titulares protegidos por el presente
Libro.
4. La realización de actividades propias de una sociedad de gestión colectiva sin contar
con la respectiva autorización de la Dirección de Derecho de Autor.
5. La difusión que haya tenido la infracción cometida.6. La reiterada o reincidencia en la realización de las infracciones y faltas prohibidas.
II. También incurrirá en falta grave aquel que fabrique, ensamble, importe, modifique, venda,
alquile, ofrezca para la venta o alquiler, o ponga de cualquier manera en circulación dispositivos,
sistemas, esquemas o equipos capaces de soslayar otro dispositivo destinado a impedir o restringir la
realización de copias de obras, o a menoscabar la calidad de las copias realizadas, o capaces de
permitir o fomentar la recepción de un programa  codificado, radiodifundido o comunicado en otra
forma al público, por aquellos que no estén autorizados para ello.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 143
SECCIÓN II
SANCIONES
Artículo 204.  Criterios para determinar sanciones.
La Dirección de Derecho de Autor tiene facultad para imponer sanciones que correspondan a las
infracciones del derecho de autor y derechos conexos protegidos en la legislación, de acuerdo a:
1. la gravedad de la falta;2. la conducta del infractor a lo largo del procedimiento;
3. el perjuicio económico que hubiese causado la infracción;
4. el beneficio ilícito obtenido por el infractor;  y
5. otros criterios que dependiendo de cada caso particular, considere adecuado adoptar la
Dirección.
Artículo 205.  Clase de sanciones administrativas.
El Director de la Oficina Nacion al Competente y el Director de Derecho de Autor podrán imponer
conjunta o indistintamente, las siguientes sanciones:
1. amonestación;
2. multa de hasta cincuenta veces del valor de mercado que deje de percibir el titular;
3. reparación de las omisiones;
4. cierre temporal hasta 30 días del establecimiento;
5. cierre definitivo del establecimiento;
6. incautación definitiva;
7. publicación de la resolución a costa del infractor en órgano de prensa de circulación
nacional.
Artículo 206.  Sanción por inobservancia a resoluciones administrativas.
El Director de la Oficina Naci onal Competente o el Director de Derecho de Autor impondrá igual
sanción que la establecida en el artículo anterior numeral 2, a quienes obstaculicen o dificultaren el
cumplimiento de los actos, medidas o inspecciones dispuestos por ellos o no enviaren la información
solicitada dentro del término concedido en el artículo 196 del presente Libro.
Artículo 207.  Multas coercitivas sucesivas.
La Oficina Nacional Competente o la Dirección de Derecho de Autor podrá imponer al infractor
multas coercitivas sucesivas, hasta que se cumpla con lo ordenado en el mandato de sus resolucionesdefinitivas, así como la obligación de reparar las omisiones o adulteraciones en que hubiere incurrido,
señalando un plazo perentorio bajo apercibimiento de multa, todo ello sin perjuicio de la aplicación de
las demás sanciones y medidas que fueren procedentes.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 144
Artículo 208.  Término para el pago de multas.
Los montos correspondientes a las multas deberán ser abonados en la Oficina Nacional Competente,
dentro del término de cinco días, vencidos los cuales se ordenará su cobranza coactiva, por la
Asesoría de la Oficina Nacional Competente.
Artículo 209.  Publicación de la resolución administrativa.
La Oficina Nacional Competente o Dirección de Derecho de Autor podrá ordenar de oficio o a
solicitud de parte, la publicación de la resolución administrativa correspondiente, en el Órgano de
publicación oficial, por una sola vez, a expensas del infractor.
SECCIÓN III
MEDIDAS EN FRONTERA Y LA ADUANA NACIONAL
Artículo 210.  Competencia de la Aduana Nacional.
Las medidas cautelares y otras que deban aplicarse en la frontera, se ejecutarán por la Aduana
Nacional o por quien tenga delegación expresa al momento de la importación, exportación o tránsito
de mercancías pirata que lesionan el derecho de autor y de los materiales o medios que sirvieranprincipalmente para cometer la infracción.
Artículo 211.  Facultades de la Aduana Nacional.
I. La Aduana Nacional y todos quienes tengan el control del ingreso o salida de mercaderías al o
desde el país, de oficio o a petición de parte tienen la obligación de impedir que ingresen o se
exporten productos que de cualquier modo violen los derechos de autor y derechos conexos.
II. Si a petición de parte interesada no impidieren el ingreso o exportación de tales bienes, serán
considerados cómplices del delito que se cometa, sin perjuicio de la sanción administrativaque corresponda.
III. Cuando impidieren, de oficio o a petición de parte, el ingreso o exportación de cualquier
producto que viole los derechos de propiedad intelectual, lo pondrán en conocimiento
mediante informe con inventario pormenorizado a la Oficina Nacional Competente, Dirección
de Derecho de Autor o delegados departamentales, quienes en el término de 15 días
confirmarán o revocarán la medida tomada.  Confirmada la medida adoptada, los bienes seránpuestos a disposición del juez o tribunal en lo penal competente.
Artículo 212.  Suspensión de importación o exportación.
I. El titular de un derecho protegido por el pr esente Libro, que tuviera motivos fundados para
suponer que se prepara la importación o la exportación de productos que infringen ese
derecho, podrá solicitar a la autoridad administrativa o judicial competente que solicite a la
Aduana Nacional disponga suspender esa importación o exportación al momento de su
despacho.  Se aplicarán a esa solicitud y a la orden que dicte la Aduana Nacional, las
condiciones y garantías aplicables a las medidas cautelares.
II. Cumplidas las condiciones y garantías aplicables, la autoridad administrativa o judicial
competente ordenará o denegará la aplicación de la medida en frontera solicitada ycomunicará al solicitante.IP/Q/BOL/1, IP/Q2/BOL/1,
IP/Q3/BOL/1, IP/Q4/BOL/1
Page 145
III. Quien solicite las medidas de frontera, deberá otorgar a las autoridades de aduanas la
información necesaria y una descripción suficientemente detallada y precisa de las mercancíaspara que puedan ser identificadas y reconocidas.
IV. Ejecutada la medida, por la autoridad competente de la Aduana Nacional, notificará
inmediatamente al importador o exportador de las mercancías y al solicitante.
Artículo 213.  Duración de la suspensión ordenada con la medida en frontera.
I. Dentro de quince (15) días hábiles de la ejecución de la medida en frontera, la Aduana
Nacional deberá recibir la notificación oficial de la autoridad administrativa o judicial,
indicando que el solicitante de la medida, ha in iciado acción sobre el fondo del asunto.  De no
ser notificado en dicho término, la Aduana Nacional levantará la medida y se despacharán las
mercancías retenidas.
II. Iniciada la acción sobre el fondo, la parte afectada por la medida, podrá recurrir a la autoridad
administrativa o judicial competente para que reconsidere la suspensión ordenada.  Se le daráaudiencia a estos efectos.
III. El solicitante de medidas en la frontera, responderá por los daños y perjuicios resultantes de
su ejecución si las medidas se levantaran o fuesen revocadas por acción y omisión del
solicitante, o si posteriormente se determina que no hubo infracción o inminencia deinfracción a un derecho de autor.
Artículo 214.  Derecho de inspección e información.
I. Cuando se trate de justificar la prolongación de la suspensión de las mercancías retenidas por
las autoridades de aduana, o para sustentar una acción, la autoridad competente permitirá al
titular del derecho inspeccionar esas mercancías.  Igual derecho corresponderá al importador o
exportador de las mercancías.  Al permitir la inspección, la autoridad podrá disponer lonecesario para proteger cualquier información confidencial, cuando fuese pertinente.
II. Comprobada la existencia de una infracción o comisión de un delito, se comunicará al
demandante el nombre y dirección del consig nador, del importador o exportador y del
consignatario de las mercancías, y la cantidad de las mercancías objeto de la suspensión.
Artículo 215.  Medidas contra productos piratas.
Tratándose de productos que ostenten infracciones o violaciones del derecho de autor, que se hubieran
incautado por las autoridades de aduanas, no se permitirá que estos productos sean reexportados en elmismo estado, ni que sean sometidos a un proceso aduanero diferente.
Artículo 216.  Destino de mercaderías infractoras.
Sin perjuicio de las demás acciones que correspondan al titular del derecho y a reserva del derecho del
demandado a interponer los recursos correspondientes, las autoridades de la Aduana Nacional tendrán
en cuenta lo establecido en el artículo 159 del presente Libro teniendo en consideración la proporción
entre la gravedad de la infracción, las medidas ordenadas y los intereses de terceros.
__________